Home

Owners Manual - Dealer e

1. 32 LATCH Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren 59 Latches Hood dis sis ope e a seen ae Res 103 Lead Free Gasoline 250 Life of Tires aces RR RR a asa a 241 Light Bulbs 2 2222222 2 321 Lights so peeled xor tag aed soaks 65 104 PAL OAS Sis tice teh BR tice 41 52 64 140 Back Up sd x RR eRe ea 324 Brake Warning eg hee 145 Bulb Replacement 322 Center Mounted Stop 326 Daytime Running 107 Dimmer Switch Headlight 105 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator am a debe sua due 222 Engine Temperature Warning 141 ik idk ask er nn 107 144 323 Headlight Switch em Ra 105 Headlights dea eee keeps 105 High Beam Indicator 145 Illuminated Entry 16 Instrument Cluster 105 InteriOE s uec dep d e Ue dud 104 LICENSE 45 5 ak e Reds 326 Lights On Reminder 107 Low oim d e REI RA 140 Malfunction Indicator Check Engine 143 Map Reading 104 Oil 4 140 PASSING esae Oa Pee endo a Ede 106 Seat Belt Reminder ies exer RR essa 140 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 15 INDEX 365 Theft Alarm Security
2. 207 Steering 225 302 Til 66 112 Wheel Tilt ww s INDEX 369 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls e cs sse m ehe E E e ee 188 5 caca ach Edo eR Ede 321 storage Vehicle iiie Remb 200 Stuck Freeing sere dave cba deve ERA 282 Sun espe Eg 5 121 Supplemental Restraint System Airbag 40 Synthetic Engine Oil 297 System Navigation 181 Tachomieter ise tree faaite na 139 MASE acea ae 324 Telescoping Steering Column 112 Temperature Gauge Engine Coolant 139 273 Tether Anchor Child Restraint 57 Theft Alarm Security Alarm 14 Theft System Security Alarm 14 Tilt Steering Column 112 Time Delay Headlight 106 Jip Statt e ER 208 Tire and Loading Information Placard 231 Tire Identification Number TIN 230 Tire Markings Tire Safety Information 227 2 MCCC 65 235 354 Aging Life of Tires 24 4 cack sasea emen 241 AIE PresSUfe te the tos 235 Alignment see RERO 242 Chains corrent heal deabus 248 Changing 274 Compact Spates be eee 238 Flat Changing 522 2252 eme ee ea a 279 Gen
3. 248 H Tire Rotation Recommendations 249 Requirements 250 2 4L And 2 7L Engines 250 3 5 Ec 251124 1 0 Frase Epa m Bees fe os 250 Reformulated Gasoline 251 Gasoline Oxygenate Blends 251 MMT In Gasoline 252 Materials Added To 252 Fuel System Cautions 252 Carbon Monoxide Warnings 253 Bi Flexible Fuel 2 7L Engines Only Except California 253 E 85 General Information 253 Ethanol Fuel E 85 254 Fuel Requirements 254 Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles E 85 And Gasoline Vehicles 255 Staf hg ence ex eu Cruising Range csse ex send ene s Replacement Parts Maintenance 44s duet eda res Ia dine Fuels reor eoe Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap 256 Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 257 B Vehicl Loading eves ecw cate ae se acd 258 Vehicle Certification Label 258 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR 259 Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR 259 Overloading eda erp 259 206 STARTING AND OPERATING Loading
4. 145 Brakes 4 6 s44 084 0040 RES RE ER de 217 310 Brake Transmission Interlock 212 Break In Recommendations New Vehicle 63 Bulb Replacement 321 322 Bulbs Light lu sue RR RR RR A 321 Calibration Compass 151 Capacities Fluid eres ted a 327 Caps Filler Fuel Robs de kos eee ss 256 Oil Engine 287 288 289 296 Car Washes ii Sed ds ke epe d 314 Carbon Monoxide Warning 253 Catalytic Converter 298 Caution Exhaust Gas 64 CD Compact Disc Player Maintenance 189 Cellular Phone 73 188 Center High Mounted Stop Light 326 Chains TIIE ieu eget e Euren deri G us a 248 Changing A Flat Tire 274 Chart Tire Sizing 255 94 die E eme 228 Check Engine Light Malfunction Indicator Light 291 Child Restraint 54 55 59 61 Child Restraint Tether Anchors 57 59 Child Restraint with Automatic Belts 57 Child Safety Locks Cigar Lighter o RR Clean Air Gasoline Cleaning Wheels Climate Control eere xA C loe zo ses dusters Boe 360 ND Com Holder rsrs SER die eed eee 128 Compact Disc CD Maintenance 189 Compact Spare lire 2 9 238 COmpasS 222225140555
5. 258 STARTING AND OPERATING NOTE Tighten the gas cap about 1 4 turn until you hear one click This is an indication that cap is properly tightened If the gas cap is not tighten properly the Malfunction Indicator Light will come on Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time the vehicle is refueled WARNING A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle You could be burned Always place gas containers on the ground while filling VEHICLE LOADING The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown on the Vehicle Certification Label This information should be used for passenger and luggage loading as indicated Vehicle Curb Weight MARRE 3287 Ibs 1491 kg Pur s alikuwa ga 3356 Ibs 1522 kg 351 lod dase doch vs 3484 Ibs 1580 kg If the seatbacks are folded for carrying cargo do not exceed the specified GVWR and GAWR Vehicle Certification Label Your vehicle has a certification label attached to the rear of the driver s door The label contains the following information e Name of manufacturer Month and year of manufacture e Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR e Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR front STARTING AND OPERATING 259 e Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR rear e Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Type of Vehicle e Month Day and Hour of Manufacture MDH The bar code allows a com
6. start the engine Apply the brakes other contr ls 0t MOVE ME Vehicle before shifting to any driving gear 5 y 55 NOTE You must press the brake pedal before shifting out of Park Normal Starting Normal Starting of either a cold or a warm engine does not require pumping or depressing the accelerator pedal Simply turn the ignition switch to the START position and release when the engine starts If the engine fails to 208 STARTING AND OPERATING start within 15 seconds turn the ignition switch to the OFF position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the normal starting procedure WARNING Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans axle cannot be started this way Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started ignite and damage the converter and vehicle If the vehicle has a discharged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from another vehicle This type of start can be dangerous if done improp erly so follow the procedure carefully See section 6 of this manual for jump starting instructions Tip Start Feature Automatic Transaxle Only Do not press the accelerator Turn the ignition key briefly to START position and release it The starter motor will continue to run but will automatically disengage itself when the engine is running Ignition Key Position Extremely Cold
7. NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment w UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES YOUR VEHICLE 121 POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED WARNING The sunroof controls are mounted between the sun visors in the Dome Reading Lamp e Never leave children in a vehicle with the keys in gu the ignition switch Occupants particularly unat tended children can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death In an accident there is greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof You could also be seriously injured or killed Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are properly secured too 81965210 Do not allow small children to operate the sun roof Never allow fingers or other body parts or any object to project through the sunroof opening Injury may result Power Sunroof Switch 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES YOUR VEHICLE ww Opening Sunroof Manual Press the switch rearward and hold and the sunroof will open automatically from any position The sunroof will open fully then stop automatically During this opera tion any release of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof Opening Sunroof Express Press the switch rearward and release and the sunroof will open automati
8. 292 Dealer Service 292 Maintenance Procedures 293 Engine ode ncs 293 Spark Plugs iiie e en 297 Catalytic Converter x use eem aere 298 Crankcase Emission Control System 299 Fuel Filter 2 2 22 4 299 Air Cleaner Element 299 Maintenance Free Battery Air Conditioner Maintenance 301 Power Steering Fluid 302 Front Suspension Ball Joints 302 Body Lubrication 303 Windshield Wiper Blades 303 Windshield Washer Reservoir 304 286 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Exhaust System Cooling System essre argas ware u s xn Hoses And Vacuum Vapor Harnesses Fuel System Connections Brake System oe oterao iris Automatic Transaxle Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion Cleaning The Center Console Cup Holders II Fuses Totally Integrated Power Module TIPM Storage xum b RAE sees 317 Replacement Bulbs 321 l Bulb Replacement cec ss Rx yn 322 Head Lamp Bulb Replacement 322 Fog Lamps
9. 323 Tail Lamps Rear Turn Signals And Backup Lamps Replacement 324 License Plate Lamp Rear 326 Center High Mounted Stop Lamp 326 Bl Fluids And Capacities 327 Bl Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts 328 Engine 290449 po edi gett RR eres 328 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 287 2 4L ENGINE COMPARTMENT COOLANT POWER AUTOMATIC BRAKE FLUID FUSES INTEGRATED STEERING TRANSMISSION BOTTLE FLUID DIPSTICK RESERVOIR POWER MODULE WASHER ENGINE OIL RADIATOR ENGINE AIR FUSES POWER FLUID Bence AR CLEANER DISTRIBUTION BOTTLE FILTER CENTER 81923 67 2 4L Engine 288 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 2 7L ENGINE COMPARTMENT COOLANT POWER AUTOMATIC PRESSURE STEERING TRANSMISSION FLUID DIPSTICK munanan E COOLANT BOTTLE BRAKE FLUID FUSES INTEGRATED RESERVOIR POWER MODULE WASHER ENGINE ENGINE OIL AIR CLEANER FUSES POWER FLUID OIL FILL DIPSTICK FILTER DISTRIBUTION BOTTLE CENTER 81923499 2 7L Engine MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 289 3 5L ENGINE COMPARTMENT COOLANT POWER AUTOMATIC BRAKE FLUID COOLANT BOTTLE PRESSURE STEERING TRANSMISSION RESERVOIR FLUID DEALER USE ONLY RAE WASHER ENGINE ENGINE OIL AIR CLEANER FUSES POWER FLUID OIL FILL DIPSTICK FILTER DISTRIBUTION BOTTLE CENTER 819c3 6a 3 5L Engine 290 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE a ONBO
10. 155 Pets RU d Yr P HU Ne ESAS 63 Phone Cellular 73 Phone Hands Free UConnect 73 Placard Tire and Loading Information 231 Power Distribution Center Fuses 318 Door LOCKS 13e BOR Aw he BE eg 24 MArKOLS osc cea cee a eee a ee dears 71 Outlet Auxiliary Electrical Outlet 124 125 Seats uuu ha deh ed od 98 SEINE 22252995 as gand 225 302 Steering Checking 302 Sunroof ssc Hess C Osea ah 121 Windows ena 26 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts 39 Preparation for Jacking 275 Pretensioners Seat DEMS 38 Programmable Electronic Features 115 119 155 INDEX 367 Programming Transmitters Remote Keyless Entry 20 115 119 Radial Ply Tires 238 Radio Broadcast Signals 158 Radio Navigation 181 Radio Operation 188 Radio Satellite 182 183 Rear Cup Holder 2e ke 131 Rear Seat Folding mes 101 102 Rear Window Defroster 202 Rearview Mirrors 70 Recorder Event Data 52 Recreational Towing 270 Refrigerant ssie 05 940 t Ped 302 Reminder Seat Belt 38 39 Re
11. Damage to the fuel system or emission control system could result from using an improper fuel tank filler tube cap gas cap A poorly fitting cap could let impurities into the fuel system CAUTION A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to turn on Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message If the vehicles diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap in loose improperly installed or damaged a GASCAP or FUEL CAP OFF message will be dis played in the instrument cluster Tighten the gas cap until a clicking sound is heard This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened Press the odometer reset button to turn the message off If the problem persists the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started This might indicate a damaged cap If the prob lem is detected twice in a row the system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL Resolving the prob lem will turn the MIL light off CAUTION To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top off the fuel tank after filling NOTE When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full WARNING e Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank filled Never add fuel when the engine is running This is in violation of most state and federal fire regulations and will cause the malfunction indi cator light to turn on
12. If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system or if exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent technician inspect the complete ex haust system and adjacent body areas for broken dam aged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for an oil change or lubrication Replace as required WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO refer to Exhaust Gas in the Safety Tips section of this manual MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 305 Cooling System WARNING e When working near the radiator cooling fan dis connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition switch to the OFF position The fan is temperature controlled and can start at any time the ignition switch is in the ON position You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood don t open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot Coolant Checks Check engine coolant antifreeze protection every 12 mo
13. KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 turned ON If the LED is not lit during starting have it checked If the light stays on or comes on while driving have the system checked by an authorized dealer Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield NOTE If the defrost feature is not functioning the cause should be located and corrected immediately The windshield could fog up while driving and obscure your visibility Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear or uneven wear patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread Inspect tread and sidewall for cuts or cracks Check wheel nuts for tightness and tires includ ing spare for proper pressure Lights Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights while you work the controls Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel engine coolant oil or other fluid leaks In addition if gasoline fumes are detected or fuel power steering fluid transmission fluid or brake fluid leaks are suspected the cause should be located and corrected immediately Information Provided DEALER UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS M
14. There is no anti pinch protection when the window is almost closed To avoid personal injury be sure to clear your arms hands fingers and all objects from the window path before closing Window Lockout Switch The window lockout switch on the driver s door allows you to disable the window control on the other doors To disable the window controls on the other doors press the window lock button To enable the window controls press the window control button again Window Lockout Switch ww EHIK sus THINGS KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 Reset Express Up Any time the vehicle battery is disconnected or goes dead the auto up function will be disabled To reactivate the auto up feature pull the window switch up to close the window completely and continue to hold the switch up for an additional two seconds after the window is closed Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open then open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open then adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting TRUNK RELEASE Use the Remote
15. 150 Compass Calibration 151 Compass Variance 151 Computer Trip Travel 149 Console s s ava thee g Goa ees 102 128 Console Floor 422 92 es een 102 128 Contract Service 352 Cooling System P n 305 Adding Coolant Antifreeze 306 Coolant Capacity 327 Coolant Level 305 308 Disposal of Used Coolant 307 Drain Flush and Refill 305 Inspection vais eee mb e ee eee 308 Points to Remember 307 308 Pressure 2 222222 5 4 rts 307 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 305 327 328 Corrosion Protection 313 Crankcase Emission Control System 299 Cruise Laight sua chura a puak s Q 143 Cup Holder Customer Assistance Data Recorder Event Dealer Service Defroster Rear Window Defroster Windshield Diagnostic System Onboard Dimmer Switch Headlight Dipsticks Automatic Transaxle Disposal Antifreeze Engine Coolant Engine Oil Door Locks Door Locks Automatic Door Opener Garage Driving On Slippery Surfaces DVD Player Video Entertainment System E 85 Fuel Electric Remote Mirrors 350 202 290 INDEX 361 Electrical Power Outlets 124 125 Electronic Speed Control Cruise Control 113 Electronic Stability
16. 6 Monitor Tire Pressure System 243 Mopar Parts 292 352 Multi Function Control Lever 105 Navigation Radio Navigation System New Vehicle Break In Period Occupant Restraints 47 50 Occupant Restraints Sedan 366 INDEX Octane Rating Gasoline Fuel 250 Odometer essare stissa me Rea pe ent 142 jM m 142 143 Enginen ax desto bdo 293 328 Capacity exe Ex X RES XXV REY 327 Change Interval 02 aka ga ee er 294 Ch cking RESET 293 Disposal icc ba nee wau ga 297 Filt r iier oe cea eeu ee ann 297 328 Identification Logo 295 Materials Added to 297 Recommendation 295 327 Synthetic 2 2 297 MISCOSYEY 2 wha x uud 296 327 Oil Pressure Light cees aita yett 140 Onboard Diagnostic System 290 291 Opener Garage Door HomeLink 115 Operator Manual Owner s Manual 4 Overdrive 213 Overheating Engine 272 Owner s Manual Operator Manual 4 353 Paint Care que dete ets 313 Panic Alari SURE Ea 19 Parking Brake 222m Rm RR 216 Passing Light ea sss eee tem eg 106 Personal Settings
17. Sor posto sa 260 Towing Requirements 265 a Trailer TOWING Pie eae se apes ed bane Y 261 Towing Tips vases redox usesti RE 269 Common Towing Definitions 261 Recreational Towing Trailer Hitch Classification 263 i Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Flat Towing With Four Wheels On The Ground i sue xs 270 Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings 263 Trailer And Tongue Weight 264 STARTING AND OPERATING 207 STARTING PROCEDURES WARNING Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat adjust both inside and outside mirrors and fasten your seat belt Be sure to turn off the engine if you want to rest or Make sure all occupants have securely fastened their seat sleep in your car Accidents can be caused by inad belts vertently moving the gear selection lever or by pressing the accelerator pedal This may cause exces sive heat in the exhaust system resulting in over heating and vehicle fire which may cause serious or fatal injuries WARNING Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be Automatic Transaxle Serious w put ans i Don tleaye i n The gear selector must be in the PARK or NEUTRAL ee ue a position before you
18. You can use your UConnect system to access a voice mail system or an automated service such as paging service or automated customer service Some services require immediate response selection in some instances that may be too quick for use of UConnect system When calling a number with your UConnect system that normally requires you to enter in a touch tone sequence on your cellular phone keypad you can push the Voice Recognition button and say the sequence you wish to enter followed by the word Send For example if required to enter your pin number followed with a pound 3 7 4 6 you can press the Voice Recognition button and say 3 7 4 6 Send Saying a number or sequence of numbers followed by Send is also to be used to navigate through an automated customer service center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager Barge In Overriding Prompts The Voice Recognition button can be used when you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice recognition command immediately For example if a prompt is playing Would you like to pair a phone clear a you could press the Voice Recognition button and say Pair a Phone to select that option without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt Turning Confirmation Prompts On Off Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system from confirming your choices e g the UConnect system will not repeat a phone number bef
19. 352 Temperature Grades 350 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE E SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you re having warranty work done be sure to have the right papers with you Take your warranty folder work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty discuss additional charges with the service manager Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle s service history This can often provide a clue to the current problem Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle s problems or the specific work you want done If you ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log let the service advisor know Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority At many dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge If you need a rental it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an ap pointment IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its dealers are vitally interested in your satisfaction We want you to be happy with our products and services Warranty service must be done by an authorized Chrysler Dodge or Jeep dealer We strongly recommend that you take your vehicle to your selling dealer They know you and your vehicle best and are most concerned that you get pr
20. Section Width in Millimeters mm 65 Aspect Ratio in Percent Ratio of section height to section width of tire 10 5 Section Width in Inches in R Construction Code R means Radial Construction D means Diagonal or Bias Construction 15 Rim Diameter in Inches in w STARTING AND OPERATING 229 EXAMPLE Service Description 95 Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the Speed Symbol should only be achieved un der specified operating conditions i e tire pressure vehicle loading road conditions and posted speed limits Load Identification blank Absence of any text on sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load SL Tire Extra Load XL Extra Load or Reinforced Tire Light Load Light Load Tire C D E Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load Maximum Load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure Maximum Pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire 230 STARTING AND OPERATING www n Tire Identification Number TIN Look for the TIN on the outboard si
21. The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing tires only The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only Avoid ice or slippery areas Jack Location The jack and jack handle are stowed under the load floor in the trunk Spare Tire Stowage The compact spare tire is stowed under the rear load floor in the trunk Spare Tire Removal Lift up the load floor cover and remove the hold down WHAT DO EMERGENCIES 275 Preparations For Jacking e Turn on the Hazard Warning Flasher Park the vehicle on a firm level surface avoid ice or slippery areas set the parking brake and place the gear selector in PARK automatic transaxle or REVERSE manual transaxle Turn OFF the ignition e Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally oppo site the jacking position For example if changing the right front tire block the left rear wheel WARNING Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the e Passengers should not remain in the vehicle while the vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off vehicle is being jacked the road to avoid the danger of being hit when 6 operating the jack or changing the wheel 276 WHAT EMERGENCIES waww Jacking Instructions 1 Remove the scissors jack and lug wrench from the spare wheel as an assembly Turn the jack screw to the left to loosen the lug wrench and
22. provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter preserved 2 Used in defense of litigation involving DaimlerChrysler Corporation product 3 Requested by police under a legal warrant 4 Otherwise required by law 54 THINGS KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE w Data Parameters that May Be Recorded Diagnostic trouble code s and warning lamp status for electronically controlled safety systems including the airbag system Airbag disable lamp status if equipped lime of airbag deployment terms of ignition cycles and vehicle mileage Airbag deployment level if applicable Impact acceleration and angle Seatbelt status Brake status service and parking brakes Accelerator status including vehicle speed Engine control status including engine speed Transmission gear selection Cruise control status Traction stability control status Tire pressure monitoring system status If Equipped Child Restraint Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all times babies and children too Every state in the United States and all Canadian provinces require that small children ride in proper restraint systems This is the law and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it Children 12 years and under should ride properly buck led up in a rear seat if available According to crash statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front WARNING In
23. teh iet eh eyes Tre Press tre de RR Remb e 235 s s 21 Tire Inflation Pressures 236 Traction Control System TCS Radial Ply Tires 238 It Equipped sqa anash saa 221 Compact Spare Tire If Equipped 238 Brake Assist System BAS If Equipped 221 Limited Use Spare If Equipped 239 Electronic Stability Program ESP Tite Spinning se 240 Tread Wear Indicators 240 a Power Steen eos ERA 225 Life Of Tite 0 ee 2 241 eo epee Replacement Dres uu sss 241 Acceleration a sisse eT pe Rr 226 Alignment And Balance 242 Traction au s Paya eae Rue Se 226 Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS W Tire Safety Information 227 JC Eg uipped eto ea ese ee pa RE RS KW 243 Tire 22 2 227 Base Tire Pressure Monitoring System Tire Identification Number TIN 230 1 EG ys niet Premium System If Equipped 244 Tire Loading And Tire Pressure 231 STARTING AND OPERATING 205 General Information 248 H Tire 248 Snow Tires
24. Headset Profile you may not be able to use any UCon nect features Refer to your cellular service provider or the phone manufacturer for details The UConnect system is fully integrated with the vehicle s audio system The volume of the UConnect UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 75 system can be adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from the steering wheel radio control right switch if so equipped The radio display will be used for visual prompts from the UConnect system such as CELL or caller ID on certain radios Operations Voice commands be used to operate the UConnect system and to navigate through the UConnect menu structure Voice commands are required after most UConnect system prompts You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options e Prior to giving a voice command one must wait for the beep which follows the Ready prompt or another prompt e For certain operations compound commands can be used For example instead of saying Setup and then Phone Pairing the following compound command can be said Setup Phone Pairing 76 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE wawrai e For each feature explanation in this section only the combined form of the voice command is given You can also break the commands into parts and say each part of the command when you are asked for it For example you can use
25. In the front seat the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt away from your neck Push anchorage button to release the anchor age and move it up or down to the position that serves you best Adjustable Anchorage As a guide if you are shorter than average you will prefer a lower position and if you are taller than average you ll prefer a higher position When you release the anchorage try to move it up or down to make sure that it is locked in position Automatic Locking Retractors ALR Mode If Equipped In this mode the shoulder belt is automatically pre locked The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt The automatic locking mode is avail able on all passenger seating positions with a combina tion lap shoulder belt When To Use The Automatic Locking Mode Anytime a child safety seat is installed in a passenger seating position Children 12 years old and under should be properly restrained in the rear seat whenever possible How To Use The Automatic Locking Mode 1 Buckle the combination lap shoulder belt 2 Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is extracted 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ww 3 Allow the belt to retract As the belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the automatic locking mode How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode Disconnect the comb
26. could cause the trailer to squat and potentially become disengaged from the tow vehicle resulting in a runaway trailer condition Towing Requirements To promote proper break in of your new vehicle driv etrain components the following guidelines are recom mended CAUTION e Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles 805 km of vehicle operation Doing so may damage your vehicle e During the first 500 miles 805 km of trailer towing limit your speed to 50 mph 80 km h Perform the maintenance listed in Section 8 of this manual When towing a trailer never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings 266 STARTING AND OPERATING www WCF _r lt rrss sia WARNING Improper towing can lead to an injury accident Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and will not shift during travel When trailering cargo that is not fully secured dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control You could lose control of your vehicle and have an accident When hauling cargo or towing a trailer do not over load your vehicle or trailer Overloading can cause a loss of control poor performance or damage to brakes axle engine transmission steering suspension chas sis structure or tires Safety chains must always be used between your vehicle and trailer Always connect the chains to the frame or hook reta
27. moved to the LOCK position This will occur if the interior lights were switched on manually or are on because a door is open This includes the glove box light but not the trunk light To restore interior light operation either turn the ignition switch ON or cycle the light switch Multi Function Control Lever The Multi Function Control Lever controls the operation of the headlights parking lights turn signals headlight beam selection instrument panel light dimming interior lights the passing lights and fog lights The lever is located on the left side of the steering column Headlights Parking Lights Instrument Panel Lights Turn the end of the Multi Function Control Lever to the first detent for parking light operation Turn to the second detent for headlight operation Turn to the third detent A for Auto headlight operation if equipped 81414631 Headlight Switch 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES YOUR VEHICLE ww To change the brightness of the instrument panel lights rotate the center portion of the Multi Function Control Lever up or down 81414630 Dimmer Control Automatic Headlight System If Equipped Turning the end of the multi function control lever to the third detent A Auto will activate the automatic headlight system With the engine running and the multi function control lever in the A Auto position the headlights will turn on and off based on the surroundin
28. safely as possible To maintain warranty coverage follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning ve hicles used for trailer towing If you have any questions or concerns after reviewing this section please consult your dealer to for full details on the towing capabilities of the vehicle Common Towing Definitions The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers cargo and tongue weight The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Gross Trailer Weight GTW The gross trailer weight GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo consumables and equipment permanent or temporary loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded and ready for operation condition The recom mended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale 262 STARTING AND OPERATING i Ws sF3WG Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR The gross combination weight rating GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination Note that GCWR ratings in clude 150 lbs 68 kg allowance for the presence of a driver Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity
29. you understand and save you concern about these ap parent malfunctions you must understand a point or two about the transmission and reception of radio sig nals Two Types of Signals There are two basic types of radio signals AM or Amplitude Modulation in which the transmitted sound causes the amplitude or height of the radio waves to vary and FM or Frequency Modulation in which the frequency of the wave is varied to carry the sound w sss scs UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 159 Electrical Disturbances Radio waves may pick up electrical disturbances during transmission They mainly affect the wave amplitude and thus remain a part of the AM reception They interfere very little with the frequency variations that carry the FM signal AM Reception AM sound is based on wave amplitude so AM reception can be disrupted by such things as lightning power lines and neon signs FM Reception Because FM transmission is based on frequency varia tions interference that consists of amplitude variations can be filtered out leaving the reception relatively clear which is the major feature of FM radio NOTE The radio steering wheel radio controls if equipped and 6 disc CD DVD changer if equipped will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned off Opening a vehicle front door will cancel this feature SALES CODE REQ AM FM STEREO RADIO AND 6 DISC CD DVD
30. 4 eso icr ort Ree 309 Tank Capacity 327 Fuel Flexible See Flexible Fuel Vehicles Fueling suere eR a 256 FUSES 2252225 exa Pax E n REY 318 Garage Door Opener HomeLink 115 Gas Cap Fuel Filler Cap 256 257 290 Gasoline Clean Air 251 Gasoline Fuel 250 Gasoline Reformulated 251 Gauges Coolant Temperature 139 Fuel iiic DEP RA Ta 139 Odometer 142 Tachometer 223 haces Ba bs 139 Gearshilt PP 213 INDEX 363 General Information 14 95 248 General Maintenance 293 Glass Cleaning s easa ee 316 Gross Axle Weight Rating 259 262 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 259 261 GVWR ure UR deg 259 Hands Free Phone UConnect 73 Hazard Warning Flasher 272 Head Restraints 101 Headlights 2 4 05 asia wher Bid 322 Bulb Replacement 322 Cleaning sce ee REPRE eee ee Er 316 HighBeam iiie e ERES 108 145 High Beam Low Beam Select Switch 108 PASSING is yaya 106 uid e 105 Heated Seats 255 dsd 99 Hitches Trailer Towing 263 H
31. ADEE DK n Electrical 159 n AM Reception 159 134 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME FM Reception Sales Code REQ AM FM Stereo Radio And 6 Disc CD DVD Changer MP3 WMA Aux Jack Operating Instructions Radio Mode Operation Instructions Disc Mode For CD And MP3 WMA Audio Play DVD Video Notes On Playing MP3 WMA Files List Button Disc Mode For MP3 WMA Info Button Disc Mode For MP3 WMA Sales Code RES AM FM Stereo Radio With CD Player MP3 Aux Jack Operating Instructions Radio Mode Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD And MP3 Audio Play Notes On Playing Files 178 List Button CD Mode For MP3 Play 180 Info Button CD Mode For Play 180 lll Sales Code AM FM CD DVD Radio With Navigation System ltBquipped suec ee cee Memes 181 Operating Instructions Satellite Radio 182 Clock Setting Procedure 182 H Satellite Radio If Equipped 183 System Activatiott essnee y ree als 183 Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ENS SID i2 183 Selecting Satelli
32. Auto Set lemperatare knobs for The system will Kliewer Contral Atomic Loser seleetable Yo uny speed Automatic Control Automatic User selectahle le any air delivery point Air Temperature Control Automatic Automatic Air Recirculation Control but gan he overridden 1 minutes ala ume Auromatie but ean be overridden Tor 10 minutes ld ms User selectahle ouside or recireulate ll Operation User selectable AAC on ar off Blower and Mode Preferred Automatic Set Mower knob to any desired aire level other than Auto Set made knob to any desired air delivery ether than Auto Set temperature knobs for comfort Loser selectable tO speed User selectable te any air delivery point Automatic User selectahle outside or recirculateu User selectable AIC on or edt Auto Climate Controls Chart 81412736 operator can override the AUTO mode setting to change airflow distribution by rotating the Mode Control knob on the right to one of the following positions Panel Mode 7 Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel These outlets can be adjusted to direct air flow Bi Level Mode 2 Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets NOTE There is a difference in temperature in any conditions ot
33. Drive ranges by changing shift points if the transaxle operating temperature exceeds acceptable lim its This is done to prevent transaxle damage due to overheating AUTOSTICK IF EQUIPPED AutoStick is a driver interactive transaxle that offers six manual ratio changes to provide you with more control AutoStick allows you to maximize engine braking eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts and im prove overall vehicle performance This system can also provide you with more control during passing city driving cold slippery conditions mountain driving trailer towing and many other situations AutoStick Shift Lever w as lt s ssEPnsoaOtCw m uuww STARTING AND OPERATING 215 AutoStick Operation By placing the selector lever one shift level below the D position it can be moved from side to side This allows the driver to select a higher or lower range of gears Moving the selector lever to the Left triggers a downshift and to the Right an upshift The gear position will display in the instrument cluster on the transaxle range indicator NOTE In Autostick mode the transaxle will only shift up or down when the driver moves the selector lever to the Right or Left Holding the lever to for at least one second will deactivate AutoStick AutoStick is also deactivated when the lever is shifted out of the or and into D AutoStick General Information e You can st
34. EVIC section of this manual for details NOTE The system can also be programmed to unlock all doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button On electronic vehicle information center EVIC equipped vehicles refer to Remote Unlock Driver s Door 1st under Personal Settings in the EVIC section of this manual On non equipped vehicles perform the following steps The system can be programmed to unlock all the doors upon the first UNLOCK button press by using the following procedure 18 THINGS KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se 1 Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed key fob 2 Continue to hold the LOCK button at least 4 seconds but not longer than 10 seconds then press and hold the UNLOCK button A single chime will sound to indicate that this feature has changed 3 Release both buttons at the same time 4 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK UNLOCK button on the keyfob NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the keyfob while you are inside the vehicle will activate the Security Alarm Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Security Alarm 5 If the desired programming was not achieved or to reactivate this feature repeat the above steps To lock the doors Press and release the LOCK button on the transmitter to lock all doors The turn signal lights will flash and the ho
35. Electrical Power Inverter If Equipped 125 Secufity du ced me ie ea 119 Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off 126 ll Power Sunroof If Equipped 1231 W Cigar Lighter And Ash Receiver 126 Opening Sunroof Manual 122 Cup Holder Ash Receiver If Equipped 126 Opening Sunroof Express 12 W Console Features 128 Closing Sunroof Manual 122 Console Feat t s serere 128 Venting Sunroof Express 122 W Cup Holders 130 Closing Sunroof Express 122 Heated Or Cooled Cup Holder Auto Sunroof Express With Anti Pinch It Equipped drm rer dee ae 130 Protection If Equipped 122 Rear Bottle Holders 131 Sunshade Operation 123 70 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES YOUR VEHICLE ww MIRRORS Inside Day Night Mirror If Equipped Adjust the mirror to center on the view through the rear window A two point pivot system allows for horizontal and vertical mirror adjustment Adjusting Manual Rear View Mirror Annoying headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position toward rear of vehicle The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position toward windshield Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped This mirror will automatically a
36. If the vehicle requires towing make sure all four wheels are off the ground WHAT DO EMERGENCIES CONTENTS Hazard Warning Flasher 272 if Your Engine Overheats 272 Engine Oil Overheating 2 4L Engine Only If Equipped zs eger Re 273 H Jacking And Tire Changing 274 Jack Location 274 Spare Tire Stowage 274 Preparations For Jacking 275 Jacking Instructions 276 ll Jump Starting Procedures Due To A Low Battery cas xus H Freeing A Stuck Vehicle Towing A Disabled Vehicle 283 With Ignition Key 2222 22 2 1 283 Without The Ignition Key 284 272 WHAT DO EMERGENCIES HAZARD WARNING FLASHER The flasher switch is located on the instrument panel below the radio Depress the switch and both cluster indicators and all front and rear directional signals will flash Depress the switch again to turn Hazard Warning Flashers off 81960499 Hazard Warning Flasher Do not use this emergency warning system when the vehicle is in motion Use it when your vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for other motorists If it is necessary to leave the vehicle to go for service the flasher system will continue to operate
37. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ws Tail Lamps Rear Turn Signals And Backup Changing the Rear Corner Tail Lamp Bulbs Lamps Replacement The tail lamps are a two piece design The turn signal brake and tail lamps are located in the rear corner body panel housing The back up and tail lamps are located in the trunk lid housing 1 Open the trunk and gently pull back the trunk liner behind the tail lamp Pull Back Trunk Liner Split Tail Lamp Assembly MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 325 2 Remove the two plastic wing nuts from the taillamp Changing the Trunk Lid Tail Lamps housing 1 With the trunk lid open unplug the lamp assembl pacation Plastic Wing Nuts Trunk Lid Tail Lamp 3 Grasp the tail lamp and pull firmly outward pushing gently on the studs from inside to disengage the lamp housing 3 Reinstall the lamp assembly locking in place 2 Remove and replace the bulb 4 Twist and remove socket from lamp 5 Remove bulb from socket and replace 326 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE a License Plate Lamp Rear 1 Remove two retaining screws holding the lamp lens in place 819ba516 Location and Removal of Rear License Lamp Lens 2 Gently pry the lens loose 3 Pull bulb from socket replace and reattach the lamp lens with the two retaining screws Center High Mounted Stop Lamp 1 Open the trunk lid to find the centrally located high mounted stop lamp High mounted Stop Lamp Bulb Replacement 2
38. S te Bek em Bete 96 Adjustment exem 96 Cleaning ee 102 316 Head Restraints 101 Heated ec ae 99 Lumbar Support 98 POWOr uice bend wau ee 98 Rear Folding 101 102 Reclining ci weak ah RU EE EE aaa 97 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 14 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 328 Selection of Oil 295 Sentry Key Immobilizer 12 Sentry Key Programming 13 Service and Maintenance 332 Service Assistance 350 Service Contract 2 2 2 2 2 352 Service Ma uals sss eee tr RR 353 Setting the Clock 157 158 160 173 182 Settings Personal 155 Shoulder Belts ce err E vo kona 32 Side Window Demisters Defrosters 200 Signals TUM Shade 324 Slippery Surfaces Driving 226 Snow lites xcii as aus qp ved 248 Spare Tite osa txt Wid Ree de e dus 238 239 274 Spark Plugs de ded 297 Specifications om TET 295 Speed Control Cruise Control 113 143 Speedometer 2259426 Ree E dE 139 Speedometer and Odometer 137 Start 222222555254 REA RR e eR k 6 207 Engine Fails to Start 208 Starting Procedures
39. Safety Catch Hood Release Lever 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES YOUR VEHICLE Sx Use the hood prop rod to secure the hood in the open position Place the upper end of the prop rod in the hole on the left underside of the hood Shi Ging Hood Prop Rod Hole Location Before closing the hood make sure to stow the prop rod in its proper location To prevent possible damage do not slam the hood to close it Use a firm downward push at the center of the hood to ensure that both latches engage WARNING If the hood is not fully latched it could fly up when the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision You could have a collision Be sure all hood latches are fully latched before driving LIGHTS Map Reading Interior Lights These lights are mounted between the sun visors above the rear view mirror Each light is turned ON by pressing the button Press the button a second time to turn the light OFF The lights will remain on until the switch is pressed a second time so be sure they have been turned off before leaving the vehicle They will not turn off automatically Interior lighting also comes on when a door is opened or the dimmer control is turned fully upward past the second detent There is a second light located midway back in the headliner es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 To protect the battery the interior lights will turn off automatically 10 minutes after the ignition switch is
40. Twist and remove socket from lamp 3 Replace the bulb and reinstall the lamp assembly locking in place with a twist w MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 327 FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES US Metric Fuel approximate 2 4L 2 7L and 3 5 Liter Engine 16 9 gallons 64 liters Engine Oil with Filter 2 4 Liter Engine SAE 5W 20 API Certified 4 5 quarts 4 26 liters 2 7 Liter Engine SAE 5W 20 API Certified 5 5 quarts 5 2 liters 3 5 Liter Engine SAE 10W 30 API Certified 5 5 quarts 5 2 liters Cooling System 2 4 Liter Engine Mopar Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile For 7 7 quarts 7 3 liters mula or equivalent 2 7 Liter Engine Mopar Antifreeze Coolant 5 100 000 Mile For 9 8 quarts 9 3 liters mula or equivalent 3 5 Liter Engine Mopar Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile For 11 6 quarts 11 0 liters mula or equivalent Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level 328 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ww FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Component Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts Engine Coolant Mopar Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technology or equivalent Engine Oil 2 4 amp 2 7 Liter Use API Certified engine oil SAE 5W 20 is recommended Refer to the en gine oil fill cap for the correct SAE grade meeting DaimlerChrysler Mate rial Standard 5 6395 Engine Oil 3 5 Lite
41. VEHICLE wn sxsroo FUSES TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse A Totally Integrated Power Module is located in the 1 40 Amp Power Top Feed engine compartment near the air cleaner assembly This Green center contains cartridge fuses and mini fuses A label 2 20 Am AWD If Appli that identifies each component may be printed on the cable ECU Red inside of the cover Refer to the graphic below for 3 10 Amp CHMSL Brake Switch FUSES TIPM location Bed Feed 4 10 Ignition Switch Feed Red 5 20 Trailer Tow Yellow 6 10 IOD Sw Pwr Red Ocm Steering Cntrl Sdar Hfm 7 30 Sensel Green 8 30 Amp IOD Sense2 Green 9 40 Amp Power Seats Fuse and Relay Center TIPM Green MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 319 Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse 10 20 Power Locks 20 15 Feed Radio Yellow Lt Blue 11 15 Power Outlet 21 10 Feed Intrus Lt Blue Red Mod Siren 12 20 Ign Run Acc Inverter 22 10 IGN RUN HVAC Yellow Red Compass Sensor 13 20 Pwr run Acc Outlet 23 15 Amp ASD Relay Feed Yellow RR Lt Blue 3 14 10 100 CCN Interior 24 25 Amp _ PWR Sunroof Feed Red Lighting Natural 15 4
42. a tether strap a hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension of the strap 60 THINGS KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE www You will first loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the reach If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages Next restraint installation instead of tucking the seat belt attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the behind the child restraint route the seat belt through seat cover material Then rotate the tether anchorage the child restraint belt path and then buckle it This cover directly behind the seat where you are placing the should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an child restraint and attach the tether strap to the anchor inquisitive child Remind all children in the vehicle age being careful to route the tether strap to provide the that the seat belts are not toys and should not be most direct path between the anchor and the child played with and never leave your child unattended in restraint Finally tighten all three straps as you push the the vehicle child restraint rearward and downward into the seat removing slack in the straps according to the child WARNING restraint manufacturer s instructions Improper installation of a child restraint to the NOTE LATCH anch
43. ability to cushion shock Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause damage that result in tire failure Tire Pressure Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Three primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob lems You could lose control of your vehicle Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly resulting in loss of vehicle control Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom mended cold tire inflation pressure 236 STARTING AND OPERATING 2 Economy Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement Under inflation also increases tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consump tion 3 Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed either on the face of the driver s door or on the driver s side B pillar Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure Information f
44. accident Towing Requirements Trailer Lights amp Wiring Whenever you pull a trailer regardless of the trailer size stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector NOTE Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles wiring harness The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector RIGHT STOP TURN 9 LEFT FEMALE STOP TURN BE tee PINS PARK 9 61326266 4 Pin Connector RUNNING BATTERY LAMPS BACKUP LAMPS LH STOP RH TURN STOP TURN ELECTRIC GROUND p BRAKES 812634 7 Towing Tips Before setting out on a trip practice turning stopping and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy traffic Make sure all trailer and vehicle lights are working properly including hazard flashers STARTING AND OPERATING 269 Towing Tips Automatic Transmission The D range can be selected when towing However if frequent shifting occurs while in this range the 3 range should be selected NOTE Using the 3 range while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve perfor mance and extend transmission life by reducing exces sive shifting and heat build up This action will also provide better engine braking The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be ch
45. and serviced by an Authorized Dealer at the start of each warm season This service should should be done by an experienced repairman 302 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cs Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling R 134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocar bon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmental Pro tection Agency and is an ozone saving product How ever the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by dealers or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C System Sealers Stop Leak Products Seal Conditioners Compres sor Oil or Refrigerants Power Steering Fluid Check Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service interval is not required The fluid should only be checked if a leak is suspected abnormal noises are apparent and or the system is not functioning as antici pated Coordinate inspection efforts through a certified DaimlerChrysler Dealership WARNING Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and with the engine off to prevent injury from moving parts and to insure accurate fluid level reading Do not overfill Use only manufacturers recommended power steering fluid If necessary add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level With a clean cloth wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid types Front Suspensi
46. are also supported The majority of MP3 WMA files use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates MPEG Sampling Fre Specification quency KHz t vate Kbpa 320 256 224 1 Audio 192 160 128 Layer 3 012 96 80 64 56 48 160 128 144 MPEG Audio 24 2205 16 112 96 80 64 y 56 48 WMA Sampling Fre Specification quency KHz Bit Rate kbps 48 64 96 128 WMA 44 1 and 48 160 192 VBR ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 WMA Files When a medium containing MP3 WMA data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 WMA files Loading times for playback of MP3 WMA files may be affected by the following Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc 170 UNDERSTAN
47. as pos sible If the light is flashing when the engine is running you may experience power loss an elevated rough idle and increased brake pedal effort and your vehicle may require towing Immediate service is required The light will come on when the ignition switch is first turned on and remain on briefly as a bulb check This is normal If the light does not come on during starting have the system checked by an authorized dealer 20 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator Light Traction Control System TCS Indicator Light If Equipped If this indicator light flashes during accelera m tion apply as little throttle as possible While driving ease up on the accelerator Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions and do not switch off the ESP or TCS if equipped 21 Turn Signal Indicators The arrows will flash in unison with the exterior turn signal when using the turn signal lever 22 Front Fog Light Indicator If Equipped O This light shows when the front fog lights are ON 23 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator Light The malfunction lamp for the ESP is com bined with BAS The yellow ESP BAS Warning Lamp comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position They should go out with the engine running If the ESP ESP BAS BAS Warning Lamp comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in either the ESP or
48. be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions ex actly when installing an infant or child restraint A rearward facing child restraint should only be used in a rear seat A rearward facing child re straint in the front seat may be struck by a deploying passenger airbag which may cause se vere or fatal injury to the infant Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child restraint Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback should use the lap shoulder belt in a rear seat e Before buying any restraint system make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards We also recommend that you make sure that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle where you will use it before you buy it The restraint must be appropriate for your child s weight and height Check the label on the restraint for weight and height limits Carefully follow the instructions that come with the restraint If you install the restraint improperly it may not work when you need it The passenger seat belts are equipped with either cinching latch plates or seat belt retractors that can be switched to an automatic locking mode which are designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip
49. box AutoPlay If Equipped When this is set to ON and a DVD video is inserted it will bypass the DVD menu screen and automatically play the movie In some rare cases the DVD player may not auto play the main title In such cases use the menu button on the remote control to select desired title to play NOTE The user will have to set these defaults before loading a disc If changes are made to these settings after a disc is loaded changes will not be effective Also the defaults are effective only if the disc supports the cus tomer preferred settings AM and FM Buttons Radio Mode Press buttons to select AM or FM Modes SET Button Radio Mode To Set the Push Button Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to push button memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into push button memory You may add a second station to each push button by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations to be stored into push button memory T
50. first Video Console If Equipped exposing the upper bin by operating the right latch The optional VES Video Entertainment System in with the armrest down cludes the following components The first storage bin can be used to hold smaller items e The screen for a rear seat DVD player is stored under the armrest e The lower storage bin includes a molded in coin holder room for CD s DVD s and a power outlet that e Remote Control allows a cell phone to recharge while concealed s Audo Video RCA Tacks p i NOTE Anotch in the side of the console base under the mu armrest will also allow use of cell phone while still plugged into the power outlet and with the armrest latched down NOTE The power outlet located inside the console can also energize the cigar lighter in the available Smoker s Package Video Console 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES YOUR VEHICLE ww CUP HOLDERS Heated or Cooled Cup Holder If Equipped With this feature the rear cavity of the cup holder can heat or cool the beverage container it is holding The rear cup holder can heat from room temperature 70 F 21 C to 140 F 60 C or cool it to near freezing 0 F 20 C The switch is located on the front of the center console and has three positions HEAT OFF COOL When the unit is on and the LED is Red the cup holder is being heated When the LED is Blue the cup holder is being cooled Cooled or Heated Cup Holder A sp
51. heard This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened Press the odometer reset button to turn the message off If the problem persists the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started This MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 291 might indicate a damaged cap If the problem is detected twice in a row the system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL Resolving the problem will turn the MIL light off EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle s emissions control system Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration For states which have an I M Inspection and Maintenance requirement this check verifies the following the MIL Malfunction Indicator Lamp is functioning and is not on when the engine is running and that the OBD On Board Diagnostic system is ready for testing Normally the OBD system will be ready The OBD system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced if you recently had a dead battery or a battery replacement If the OBD system should be determined not ready for the I M test your vehicle may fail the test Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test which you can use prior to going to the test station To check if your vehicle s OBD system is ready you must do the following 1 Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch 2 Turn the
52. low to medium blower setting 90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ww low to medium vehicle speed low road noise e smooth road surface fully closed windows and dry weather condition operation from driver seat e Performance such as audio clarity echo and loudness to a large degree rely on the phone and network and not the UConnect system e Echo at far end can sometime be reduced by lowering the in vehicle audio volume Bluetooth Communication Link Cellular phones have been found to lose connection to the UConnect system When this happens the connec tion can generally be re established by switching the phone off on Your cell phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth on mode Power Up After switching the ignition key from OFF to either ON or ACC position or after a language change you must wait at least five 5 seconds prior to using the system UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91 Voice Command Tree Main Menu Y Towing English Francais Last See Enter Enter Number The 32 name languaqe Bhansbapk See Setup Name Number on Phone specific phonebook will be Flowchart Flowchart is redialed used The phones paired are available across all languages Number associated Number with entry is Dialed is dialed Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 81940265 92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES YOUR VE
53. movement and possible injury or damage R Reverse Shift into this range only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop N Neutral Engine may be started in this range D Overdrive For most city and highway driving it provides smoothest upshifts and downshifts and best fuel economy When frequent transaxle shifting occurs while using the D Overdrive position such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions ie in hilly terrain traveling into strong head winds or while towing heavy trailers using the 3 position will improve performance and extend transaxle life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up 214 STARTING AND OPERATING ww mwshs swnT sU 3 Drive This range eliminates shifts into Overdrive The transaxle will operate normally in First Second and Third while in this range The 3 position should also be used when descending steep grades to prevent brake system dis tress NOTE Using the 3 range while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve perfor mance and extend transaxle life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up L Low This range should be used for engine braking when descending very steep grades In this range upshifts will occur only to prevent engine overspeed while downshifts occur earlier than other gear range selections NOTE The vehicle computer will over ride Overdrive and 3
54. not recommended because it may cause window fogging 200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ww a Vacation Storage Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air condi tioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will insure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of com pressor damage when the system is started again Window Fogging Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re moved by turning the mode selector to Defrost The Defrost Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear windshield and provide sufficient heating If side win dow fogging becomes a problem increase blower speed Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but rainy or humid weather NOTE Recirculate without A C should not be used for long periods as fogging may occur Side Window Demisters A side window demister outlet is at each end of the instrument panel These nonadjustable outlets direct air toward the side windows when the system is in either the FLOOR MIX or DEFROST mode The air is directed at the area of the windows through which you view the outside mirrors Outside Air Intake Make sure the air intake located directly in front of the windshield is free of obstructions such as leaves Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow and if they enter the plenum they could plug the water drai
55. numbers can be used to order duplicate keys from your dealer Ask your dealer for these numbers and keep them in a safe place 81961922 Vehicle Key Ignition Key Removal Automatic Transaxle Place the shift lever in PARK Turn the ignition switch to the ACC position push the key and cylinder inward rotate the key to the LOCK position and remove the key Ignition Key Position NOTE If you try to remove the key before you place the lever in PARK the key may become trapped tempo rarily in the ignition cylinder If this occurs rotate the key to the right slightly then remove the key as described If a malfunction occurs the system will trap the key in the s THINGS KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11 ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety feature is inoperable The engine can be started and stopped but the key cannot be removed until you obtain service NOTE The power window switches radio and power outlets will remain active for up to 45 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned off Opening a vehicle front door will cancel this feature WARNING NEVER leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Don t leave the keys in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle CAUTION An unlocked car is an invit
56. of Lubricant 329 Transmission Range Indicator 141 Transmitter Battery Service Remote Keyless Entry 20 Transmitter Garage Door Opener HomeLink 115 Transmitter Programming Remote Keyless Entry 20 Transporting Pets scs 1 e pisip aisse 63 Tread Wear Indicators 240 Tip Odometer 422 0400 a 142 Trip Odometer Reset Button 143 Trunk Release Emergency 30 Trunk Release Remote Control 29 Turn Signals 22222 2 4 108 144 324 UConnect Hands Free Phone 73 Understanding Your Instrument Panel 136 Uniform Tire Quality Grades 354 Universal Transmitter 115 Unleaded Gasoline 250 Upholstery Carne eed rem Ee tes 315 INDEX 371 Vacuum Vapor Harnesses 309 Vanity Mirrors 73 Variance Compass 151 Vehicle Certification Label 258 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 6 Vehicle Loading 232 258 260 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 6 Vehicle Storage sssi ki ce ane ee 200 321 Vehicle Theft Alarm Security Alarm 14 Video Entertainment System Rear Seat Video System 187 Warning Ligh
57. off while re buckling the seat belt It may be necessary to retract the seat belt partially each time when unbuckling 4 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position A single chime will sound to signify that you have success fully completed the programming The Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert can be reacti vated by repeating this procedure NOTE Although the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert has been deactivated the Seat Belt Warning Light will continue to illuminate while the driver s seat belt remains unbuckled Seat Belts And Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts throughout their pregnancy Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Seat Belt Extender If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage if equipped is in its lowest position your dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender This extender should be used only if the existing belt is not long enough When it is not required remove the extender and stow it WARNING Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the ri
58. remove the wrench from the jack assembly NOTE The Jack Handle attaches to the side of the jack with two attachment points When the jack is partially expanded the tension between the two attachment points holds the jack handle in place 81950689 Removing Jack Handle From Jack 2 Loosen but do not remove the wheel nuts by turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the ground WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 277 552 mr ET po pum 8195062 Jacking Locations 278 WHAT DO EMERGENCIES w Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking locations other than those indicated in step 3 3 There are two front jacking locations and two rear jacking locations on each side of the body The front locations are outlined by two triangular cutouts the rear ones by two rectangular cutouts For vehicles equipped with plastic trim the plastic has been cut away to expose the jacking locations in the body Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is securely engaged 4 Turn the jack screw to the left until the jack can be placed under the jacking location Once the jack is positioned turn the jack screw to the right until the jack head is properly engaged with the lift area closest to the wheel to be changed Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is securely engaged WARNING Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicl
59. systems having attachments designed to connect to the lower anchorages are now available Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection to the top tether anchorage have been available for some time In fact many child restraint manufacturers will provide add on tether strap kits for some of their older products Tether anchorage kits are also available for most older vehicles Rear Seat LATCH Anchors Because the lower anchorages are to be introduced to passenger carrying vehicles over a period of years child restraint systems having attachments for those anchor ages will continue to have features for installation in vehicles using the lap or shoulder belt They will also have tether straps and you are urged to take advantage of all of the available attachments provided with your child restraint in any vehicle THINGS KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 NOTE When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint please ensure that all seat belts not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of children It is recommended that before installing the child restraint buckle the seat belt so the seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of reach If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation instead of tucking the seat belt behind the child restraint route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then
60. that the system is armed 10 Seat Belt Reminder Light When the ignition switch is first turned ON this light will come on for about six seconds A chime will sound if you have not pulled the shoulder belt out of the retractor This is a reminder to buckle up If you do not buckle up the light will remain on 11 Oil Pressure Light 71 Shows low engine oil pressure The light will come on and remain on when the ignition switch is turned from the OFF to the ON position and the light will turn off after the engine is started If the bulb does not come on during starting have the system checked by an authorized dealer If the light comes on and remains on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the engine DO NOT OPERATE THE VEHICLE UNTIL THE CAUSE I CORRECTED The light does not show the quantity of oil in the engine This can be determined using the procedure shown in Section 7 12 Engine Temperature Warning Light This light warns of an overheated engine con dition If the engine is critically hot a warning chime will sound 10 times After the chime turns off the engine will still be critically hot until the light goes out Fuller 13 Transmission Range Indicator This display indicator shows the automatic transaxle gear selection 14 Tire Pressure Monitor Light Each tire including the spare if provided 1 should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recom mended
61. the combined form voice com mand Phonebook New Entry or you can break the combined form command into two voice commands Phonebook and New Entry Please remember the UConnect system works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone as if speaking to some one sitting eight feet away from you Voice Command Tree Refer to Voice Tree at the end of this section Help Command If you need assistance at any prompt or if you want to know your options at any prompt say Help following the beep The UConnect system will play all the options at any prompt if you ask for help To activate the UConnect system from idle simply press the Phone button and follow audible prompts for directions All UConnect system sessions begin with a press of the Phone button on the radio control head Cancel Command At any prompt after the beep you can say Cancel and you will be returned to the main menu However in a few instances the system will take you back to the previous menu Pair Link UConnect System to a Cellular Phone To begin using your UConnect system you must pair your compatible Bluetooth enabled cellular phone To complete the pairing process you will need to refer ence your cellular phone owner s manual One of the following vehicle specific websites may also provide detailed instructions for pairing with the brand of phone that you have NOTE e www chrysler com uconnect e w
62. the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ibs on the Tire and Loading Information placard The combined weight of occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight if applicable should never exceed the weight referenced here Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement combined weight of occu pants and cargo should never exceed XXX pounds on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas sengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if XXX amount equals 1400 Ibs and there will be five 150 Ib passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 Ibs since 5 150 750 and 1400 750 650 Ibs 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 ww sss sswwss csa STARTING AND OPERATING 233 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle NOTE The following table shows exam
63. the sunroof opens NOTE The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if so equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open then open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sun roof opening to minimize the buffeting Sunroof Maintenance Use only a non abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel Ignition Off Operation For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power sunroof switch will remain active for 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned off Opening either front door will cancel this feature For vehicles equipped with the EVIC the power sunroof switch will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned off Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time is programmable For details refer to Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit under Personal Settings Customer Program mable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATUR
64. tire sizing is based on U S design standards P Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation Ex ample P215 65R15 95H STARTING AND OPERATING 227 European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width The letter P is absent from this tire size designation Example 215 65R15 96H e LT Light Truck Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards The size designation for LT Metric tires is the same as for P Metric tires except for the letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preced ing the size designation Example LT235 85R16 Temporary Spare tires are high pressure compact spares designed for temporary emergency use only Tires designed to this standard have the letter T molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example T145 80D18 103M High Flotation tire sizing is based on U S design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall Example 31x10 5 15 228 STARTING AND OPERATING wwwC_ Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE Size Designation P Passenger car tire size based on U S design standards blank Passenger car tire based on European design standards LT Light Truck tire based on U S design standards T Temporary Spare tire 31 Overall Diameter in Inches in 215
65. turn back on when the turn signal is not operating Lights On Reminder If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition is turned OFF a chime will sound to alert the driver when the driver s door is opened Fog Lights If Equipped O The front fog light switch is on the Multi Function Control Lever To activate the front fog lights turn on the parking lights or the low beam headlights and pull out the end of the control lever Front Fog Light Control NOTE The front fog lights will only operate with the headlights on low beam Selecting high beam headlights will turn off the front fog lights 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES YOUR VEHICLE ww Turn Signals Move the Multi Function Control Lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights You can signal a lane change by moving the lever partially up or down without moving beyond the detent 8181650 Turn Signal Control If either light remains on and does not flash or there is a very fast flash rate check for a defective outside light bulb If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved it would suggest that the fuse or indicator bulb is defective Highbeam Lowbeam Select Switch Push the Multi Function Control Lever away from you to switch the headlights to HIGH beam Pull the Lever toward you to switch the headlights back to Low beam 85
66. up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down SEEK Button Auxiliary Mode No function SCAN Button Auxiliary Mode No function EJECT Button Auxiliary Mode No function A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 171 PSCAN Button Auxiliary Mode No function TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display from elapsed playing time to time of day The time of day will be displayed for 5 seconds RW FF Auxiliary Mode No function SET Button Auxiliary Mode No function Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone If Equipped Refer to Hands Free Phone in Section 3 of the Owner s Manual Operating Instructions Satellite Radio Mode If Equipped Refer to the Satellite Radio section of the Owner s Manual Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES If Equipped Refer to separate Video Entertainment System VES Guide Dolby Manufactured under licence from Dolby Laboratories Dolby and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Macrovision This product incorporates copyright protection tech nology that is protected by U S patents and other intellectual property rights Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macro vision and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited
67. up to manufacturers specifica tions should be obtained immediately To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage e Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition when the transaxle is in gear and the vehicle is in motion Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 299 e Do not idle the engine with any ignition coil connec tors disconnected for prolonged periods Crankcase Emission Control System Proper operation of this system depends on freedom from sticking or plugging due to deposits As vehicle mileage builds up the PCV valve and passages may accumulate deposits If a valve is not working properly replace it with a new valve DO NOT ATTEMPT TO CLEAN THE OLD PCV VALVE Check ventilation hose for indication of damage or plugging deposits Replace if necessary Fuel Filter A plugged fuel filter can cause hard starting or limit the speed at which a vehicle can be driven Should an excessive amount of dirt accumulate in the fuel tank frequent filter replacement may be necessary The fuel filters are located inside the fuel tank See your dealer for service Air Cleaner Element Filter Under normal driving conditions replace the filter at the intervals shown on Schedule A If however you drive the vehicle frequently under dusty or severe conditions the filter element should be inspected periodically and replaced if necessary at the intervals sho
68. wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels Then shift back and forth between Reverse and First gear Usually the least accelerator pedal pres sure to maintain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels is most effective WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 283 WARNING TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE With Ignition Key Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause axle tire Automatic And Manual Transaxle damage or failure A tire could explode and injure Front wheel drive vehicles must have the front wheels someone Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster elevated all wheel drive vehicles must be hauled on a than 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 seconds flatbed truck continuously without stopping when you are stuck And don t let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed CAUTION If the vehicle being towed requires steering the CAUTION ignition switch must be in the ACCESSORY posi tion not in the LOCK position Transaxles Racing the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transaxle overheating and failure It can also damage the tires Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph 48 km h Do not spin the wheels continu ously for more than 30 seconds Do not attempt to use sling type equipment when towing When securing vehicle to flat bed truck do not attach to front or rear suspension components Damage to your vehicle
69. with chemicals They are not permanent and normally heal quickly However if you haven t healed significantly within a few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor immediately As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke like particles The particles are a normal by product of the process that generates the nontoxic gas used for airbag inflation These airborne particles may irritate the skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye irritation rinse the area with cool water For nose or throat irritation move to fresh air If the irritation continues see your doctor If these particles settle your clothing follow the garment manufacturer s instruc tions for cleaning ww THINGS KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 e It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the Maintaining Your Airbag System airbags have deployed If you are involved in another collision the airbags will not be in place to protect you WARNING WARNING Modifications to any part of the airbag system could cause it to fail when you need it You could Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot be injured if the airbag system is not there to protect you in another collision Have the airbags protect you Do not modify the components or seat belt pretensioners and the front passenger seat wiring including adding any kind of badges or belt retractor assembly replaced by an authorized stickers to the steering wheel hub tr
70. with the ignition key removed and the vehicle locked NOTE With extended use the flasher may wear down your battery IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS In any of the following situations you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac tion e On the highways Slow down e In city traffic While stopped put transaxle in neutral but do not increase engine idle speed If the pointer rises to the H red mark the instrument cluster will sound a chime Pull over and stop the vehicle with the engine at idle when safe Turn off the air conditioning and wait until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H red mark for more than a minute turn the engine off imme diately and call for service WHAT DO IN EMERGENCIES 273 NOTE There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition If your air conditioner is on turn it off The air conditioning system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning off the A C removes this heat You can also turn the Temperature control to maximum heat the Mode control to floor and the fan control to High This allows the heater core to act asa supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system Engine Oil Overheating 2 4L Engine Only If Equipped During sustained high speed driving or trailer tow up long grades on hot day the engine oil temperature may beco
71. your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together Positioning the Lap Belt 36 THINGS KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 6 To release the belt push the red button on the buckle The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to internal injury in a collision The belt forces won t allow the belt to retract fully be at the strong hip and pelvic bones but across your abdomen Always wear the lap belt as low as pos WARNING A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays or loose sible and keep it snug e A twisted belt can t do its job as well In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the belt is straight If you can t straighten a belt in your vehicle take it to your dealer and have it fixed parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt o n assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they 5 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing comfortable and not resting on your neck The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt etc w THINGS KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
72. 0 Amp RAD Fan Relay Bat 25 10 Heated Mirror Green tery Feed Red 16 15 IGN Run Acc Cigar 26 15 Amp ASD Relay Feed Lt Blue Ltr Sunroof Lt Blue 2 17 10 Feed Mod Wcm 27 10 RUN Only ORC Red Red Feed 18 40 Amp ASD Relay Contact 28 10 RUN ORC OCM Green PWR Feed Red Feed 19 20 PWR Amp 1 amp Amp 29 Hot Car No Fuse Re Yellow 2 Feed quired 320 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE n Lt Blue Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse 30 20 Amp Heated Seats Yellow 31 10 Amp Headlamp Washer Red Relay Control 32 30 Amp ENG ASD Control Pink Feed 1 33 10 Amp ABS MOD J1962 Red Conn PCM 34 30 ABS Valve Feed Pink 35 40 Amp ABS Pump Feed Green 36 30 Amp Headlamp Washer Pink Control 37 15 110 Inverter CAUTION e When installing the Totally Integrated Power Module cover it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched Failure to do so may allow water to get into the Totally Integrated Power Module and possibly result in an electrical system failure When replacing a blown fuse it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload If a properly rated fuse contin ues to blow it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be co
73. 150 would wear one and a half 1 1 2 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate Traction Grades The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C Those grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor mance WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics Temperature Grades The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A repre sent higher levels of performa
74. 181864 Highbeam Functions WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS get The wipers and washers are operated by a switch gt on the control lever lever is located on the right side of the steering column amp 1 14489 Windshield Wiper Washer Lever UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 Windshield Washers To use the washer pull the multi function control lever toward you and hold while spray is desired If the lever is pulled while in the delay range the wiper will operate in low speed for two wipe cycles after the lever is released and then resume the intermittent interval pre viously selected If the lever is pulled while in the OFF position the wipers will operate for two wipe cycles then turn OFF NOTE Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the windshield wiper blades from returning to the OFF position If the windshield wiper switch is turned OFF and the blades cannot return to the OFF position damage to the wiper motor may occur 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES YOUR VEHICLE ww Mist Feature WARNING Push down on the wiper control lever to activate a single wipe to clear the windshield of road mist or spray from Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield a passing vehicle As long as the lever is held down the could lead to an accident You might not see other wipers will continue to operate vehicles or other obstacles To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing w
75. 5 designation on the tire side wall If you need snow tires select tires equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires Use snow tires only in sets of 4 failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle STARTING AND OPERATING 249 Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph 120 km h Tire Rotation Recommendations Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at different loads and perform different steering driving and braking functions For these reasons they wear at unequal rates and tend to develop irregular wear pat terns These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type tires Rotation will increase tread life help to maintain mud snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth quiet ride Follow the recommended tire rotation frequency for your type of driving found in the Maintenance Schedules Section of this manual More frequent rotation is permis sible if desired The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected before rotating The suggested rotation method is the forward cross shown in the diagram TIRE ROTATION PATTERN FRONT OF VEHICLE 4 TIRE ROTATION 250 STARTING A
76. 60 000 70 000 80 000 90 000 100 000 Months 36 42 48 54 60 Change engine oil and oil filter X X X X X Replace engine air cleaner filter X Rotate tires X Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct X stowage Inspect brake linings Flush and replace engine coolant at 60 months if X Replace Spark Plugs 2 4L Engine M A A N C E 5 C H E D U L E 5 8 M A T E N A N C E S C H D U L 5 8 346 SCHEDULE A Era Miles 66 000 72 000 78 000 84 000 90 000 Kilometers 110 000 120 000 130 000 140 000 150 000 Months 66 72 78 84 90 Change engine oil and oil filter X X X X X Replace engine air cleaner filter X Rotate tires X 2 tire for proper pressure and correct X Inspect brake linings X Replace Spark Plugs 2 4L Engine X SCHEDULE 347 Miles 96 000 102 000 108 000 114 000 120 000 Kilometers 160 000 170 000 180 000 190 000 200 000 Months 96 102 108 114 120 Change engine oil and oil filter X X X X X Replace engine air cleaner filter X Rotate tires X for proper pressure and correct X Inspect brake linings Change Automatic Transaxle Fluid and Filter X Flush and replace engine coolant 102 000 miles X 170 000 km if not done at 60 000 miles R
77. 9 000 115 000 72 000 120 000 75 000 125 000 Change engine oil and oil filter or at 3 months whichever comes first X X X X X Inspect engine air cleaner filter replace if neces sary X Rotate tires Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct stowage Inspect brake linings SCHEDULE 341 Miles Kilometers 78 000 130 000 81 000 135 000 84 000 140 000 87 000 145 000 90 000 150 000 Change engine oil and oil filter or at 3 months whichever comes first X X X X Replace engine air cleaner filter Rotate tires Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct stowage Inspect brake linings Replace Spark Plugs 2 4L Engine MM pp gt M A A N C E 5 C H E D U L E 5 8 M A T E N A N C E S C H D U L 5 8 342 SCHEDULE Miles 93 000 96 000 99 000 102 000 105 000 Kilometers 155 000 160 000 165 000 170 000 175 000 Change engine oil and oil filter or at 3 months X X X X whichever comes first Replace engine air cleaner filter Rotate tires Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct stowage Replace Spark Plugs 2 7L and 3 5L Engines X Flush and replace engine coolant if not done at 60 months Flu
78. A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode Satellite Antenna To ensure optimum reception do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location or strap items to the trunk lid around the trunk lid antenna if equipped Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance Larger lug gage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible within the loading design of the rack Do not place items directly on or above the antenna Reception Quality Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the following reasons e The vehicle is parked in an underground parking structure or under a physical obstacle e Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form of short audio mutes e Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception e Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause signal blockage Operating Instructions Satellite Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next channel in Satellite mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185 remain tuned to the new channel until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass channels without stopping until you releas
79. ARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II This system monitors the performance of the emissions engine and automatic transmission control systems When these systems are operating properly your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy as well as engine emis sions well within current government regulations If any of these systems require service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your dealer for service as soon as possible CAUTION e Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indica tor Light on could cause further damage to the emission control system It could also affect fuel economy and driveability The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be per formed If the Malfunction Indicator Light is flashing while the engine is running severe catalytic con verter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message After fuel is added the vehicle diagnostic system can determine if the fuel filler cap is loose or improperly installed A GASCAP message will be displayed in the instrument cluster Tighten the gas cap until a clicking sound is
80. Alarm 140 Traction Control i u uuu s v wass eee n 222 Turn Signal ernie 105 108 144 324 Voltage per RA eae es 140 Warning Instrument Cluster Description 139 Loading Vehicle eben 258 260 Capacilles ies es dvoid anda dant eas 260 dies es TE 231 Locks Child Protection 25 xls xe e ee ences 23 Power 4466444000446 mx 24 Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH ROUES RS 59 Lubrication Body 303 Lumbar Support 98 Maintenance Free Battery 300 Maintenance General 293 Maintenance Procedures 293 Maintenance Schedule 332 Schedule A XXE 344 Sched le erasa aa RR hr ex Bs 335 Malfunction Indicator Light Check Engine 22 2 2 2 143 291 Manual Service 353 Map Reading Lights 104 Master Cylinder Brakes 311 Mini Irip Computer i sss sasa wal ga wu gua 149 MiFTOIS Sa S ee 70 Automatic Dimming 70 Electric Powered 71 Outside ue eeu a ee a os 72 RearvieW 5525 55 egere Ee 70 Vanity lt cs5 0 o shea ees as 73 Modifications Alterations Vehicle
81. CHANGER MP3 WMA AUX JACK NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of your radio faceplate 518369 REQ Radio 160 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Press the ON VOL control to turn the radio ON Press the ON VOL a second time to turn OFF the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the volume control to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Radio Mode Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Radio Mode Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next listenable station in either AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies pausing for 5 seconds at each listenable station before continuing to the next To stop the search press SCAN a second time INFO Butt
82. DING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M LIST Button DISC Mode for MP3 WMA Play Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE control knob Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after 5 seconds INFO Button DISC Mode for MP3 WMA Play Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if available Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO button for 3 seconds or more and radio will display song titles for each file Press and hold the INFO button again for 3 seconds to return to elapsed time display Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 WMA player cassette player or microphone and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pushing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume
83. DTS DTS and DTS 2 0 are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems Inc 172 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se SALES CODE RES AM FM STEREO RADIO WITH CD PLAYER MP3 AUX JACK NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of your radio faceplate B185F815 RES Radio Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Press the ON VOLUME control knob to turn the radio on Press the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn the radio off Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it ww t UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 173 SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next listenable station in either A
84. ES YOUR VEHICLE ww ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS d There are two 12 volt electrical outlets on this vehicle Both of the outlets are protected by a fuse The 12 volt power outlet next to the ash receiver tray if equipped with an optional Smoker s Package has power available only when the ignition is on This outlet will also operate a conventional cigar lighter unit NOTE desired the power outlet next to the ash receiver tray if equipped can be converted by your authorized dealer to provide power with the ignition switch in the LOCK position Instrument Panel Power Outlet The center console outlet is powered directly from the battery power available at all times Items plugged into this outlet may discharge the battery and or prevent engine starting w UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 NOTE Due to built in overload protection the inverter will shut down if the power rating is exceeded WARNING To Avoid Serious Injury or Death Do not use a 3 Prong Adaptor Do not insert any objects into the receptacles Do not touch with wet hands Close the lid when not in use If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an Console electric shock and failure ELECTRICAL POWER INVERTER IF EQUIPPED There is a 115 VAC 150 Watts Maximum outlet in the ter console for added conve nience This outlet can power cell phones electronics and other low power devices 126 UNDE
85. Equipped This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions The system controls hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lock up and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking Refer to Anti Lock Brake System in this Section of the manual for more information about ABS Traction Control System TCS If Equipped This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels If wheel spin is detected brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel s and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability A feature of the TCS system functions similar to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning This feature remains active even if TCS and ESP are in the Partial Off mode Refer to Electronic Stability Pro gram ESP in this Section of this manual Brake Assist System BAS If Equipped The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle s braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers The system detects an emergency braking situation by sens ing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes This can help reduce braking distances The BAS complements th
86. G stopping conditions ABS inducing conditions can in clude ice snow gravel bumps railroad tracks loose The Anti Lock Brake System contains sophisticated debris or panic stops electronic equipment that may be susceptible to interference caused by improperly installed or high You also may experience the following when the brake system goes into Anti lock output radio transmitting equipment This interfer ence can cause possible loss of anti lock braking e The ABS motor running it may continue to run for a capability Installation of such equipment should be short time after the stop performed by qualified professionals the clicking sound of solenoid valves All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and type and tires must be properly inflated to produce and a slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the accurate signals for the computer end of the stop brake pedal pulsations These are all normal characteristics of ABS wa STARTING AND OPERATING 221 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM ABS TCS BAS ESP Your vehicle may be equipped with an optional ad vanced electronic brake control system that includes Anti Lock Brake System ABS Traction Control System TCS Brake Assist System BAS and Electronic Stability Program ESP All systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions and are commonly referred to as ESP Anti Lock Brake System ABS If
87. HICLE Voice Tree Phonebook Phonebook Entries Listed ane Enter Name at a time New Entry 1st Confirmation Enter Name Enter Location Enter Location Enter Location nd Confirmatian Entry Deleted Current Number is played Enter New Number Entry is modified Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined Enter Number Phonebook Cleared New Entry Added 81315294 Voice Tree Setup Confirmation Prompts Pairing Toggle Confirmation Prompts on off System Lists Phones Say 4 digit pin eode Enter Name of phone and follow prompts ta complete pairing Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined System Phone Deleted All Phones Select phone to be deleted Deleted List Phones System Lists Phones UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93 New phone will temporarily Select a language English Espanol or Francais override phone priorities 81540264 94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ww Voice Commands continue Primary Alternate s delete Zero dial one edit two emergency three English four erase all five Espanol Six Fancais seven help eight home nine language star list names plus list phones pound 4 mobile add loc
88. HICLE 301 CAUTION include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test Drive belt tension should also be checked at this It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post Battery posts are marked positive and negative and identified on the battery case Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion Apply grease to posts and clamps after tightening If a fast charger is used while the battery is in the vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables be fore connecting the charger to battery Do not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage as battery damage can result Air Conditioner Maintenance time WARNING e Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air condi tioning system Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode injuring you Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail requiring costly repairs Refer to Section 3 of the Warranty Information book for further warranty information The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected For best possible performance your air conditioner should be checked
89. If a condition is detected that could cause damage the transaxle automatically shifts into second gear The transaxle remains in second gear 3rd gear with six speed automatic despite the forward gear selected Park P Reverse R and Neutral N will continue to operate This Reset feature allows the vehicle to be driven to a dealer for service without damaging the transaxle In the event that the problem has been momentary the transaxle can be reset to regain all forward gears w sj STARTING AND OPERATING 213 e Stop the vehicle and shift into Park P e Turn the key to OFF then restart the engine e Shift into the desired range and resume driving NOTE Even if the transaxle can be reset it is recom mended that you visit a dealer at your earliest possible convenience Your dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur If the transaxle cannot be reset dealer service is required Gear Ranges for Automatic Transaxle P Park Supplements the parking brake by locking the transaxle The engine can be started in this range Never attempt to use PARK while vehicle is in motion Apply parking brake when leaving vehicle in this range DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL positions into another gear range WARNING Never use Park position on an Automatic Transaxle as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle
90. If the seat belt has a cinching latch plate pulling up on the shoulder portion of the lap shoulder belt will tighten the belt The cinching latch plate will keep the belt tight however any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary THINGS KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 If the seat belt has a switchable retractor it will have distinctive label To operate the switchable retractor please refer to Automatic Locking Retractor ALR in this section In the rear seat you may have trouble tightening the lap shoulder belt on the child restraint because the buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening on the restraint Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle end of the belt several times to shorten it Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out If the belt still can t be tightened or if by pulling and pushing on the restraint loosens the belt disconnect the latch plate from the buckle turn the latch plate around and insert the latch plate into the buckle again If you still can t make the child restraint secure try a different seating position Buckle the child into the seat according to the child restraint manufacturer s directions When your child restraint is not in use secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle Don t leave it loose in th
91. If you would like to connect or disconnect the Blue tooth connection between a UConnect paired cellular phone and the UConnect system then follow the instruction described in your cellular phone user s manual List Paired Cellular Phone Names Press the Phone button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing When prompted say List Phones The UConnect system will play the phone names of all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to the lowest priority To select or delete a paired phone being announced press the Voice Recognition button and say Select or Delete Also see the next two sections for an alternate way to select or de lete a paired phone Select another Cellular Phone This feature allows you to select and start using another phone with the UConnect system The phone must have been previously paired to the UConnect system that you want to use it with Press the Phone button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Select Phone and follow the prompts You can also press the Voice Recognition button anytime while the list is being played and then choose the phone that you wish to select The selected phone will be used for the next phone call If the selected phone is not available the UCon nect system will return to using the highest priority phone present in or near approxi
92. Keyless Entry Transmitter to open the trunk from outside the vehicle From inside the car the trunk lid can be released by depressing the Trunk Release Button located on the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel The transmission must be in Park before the switch will operate E Trunk Release Button 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE wawa With the ignition ON the word deck will display in place of the odometer display indicating that the trunk is open The odometer display will reappear once the trunk is closed or if the trip button is depressed With the key in the lock position or with the key out the word deck will display until the trunk is closed On EVIC equipped vehicles the words Trunk Ajar will display TRUNK SAFETY WARNING WARNING Do not allow children to have access to the trunk either by climbing into the trunk from outside or through the inside of the vehicle Always close the trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended Once in the trunk young children may not be able to escape even if they entered through the rear seat If trapped in the trunk children can die from suffocation or heat stroke Trunk Internal Emergency Release Interior Trunk Emergency Release NOTE As a security measure a Trunk Internal Emer gency Release lever is built into the trunk latching mechanism In the event of an individual being locked inside the trunk the trunk can be
93. LE The UConnect phone book enables you to store up to 32 names and four numbers per name Each language has a separate 32 name phone book accessible only in that language This system is driven through your Blue tooth Hands Free profile cellular phone UConnect features Bluetooth technology the global standard that enables different electronic devices to connect to each other without wires or a docking station so UCon nect works no matter where you stow your cellular phone be it your purse pocket or briefcase as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle s UConnect system The UConnect system allows up to seven cellular phones to be linked to system Only one linked or paired cellular phone can be used with the system at a time The system is available in English Spanish or French languages as equipped 81969793 Microphone Location The rearview mirror contains the microphone for the system and the radio has the two control buttons that will enable you to access the system Actual button location may vary with radio The individual buttons are de scribed in the Operations section B1965789 UConnect Buttons The UConnect system can be used with Hands Free Profile certified Bluetooth cellular phone See www chrysler com uconnect for supported phones If your cellular phone supports a different profile e g
94. LE 101 Adjustable Head Restraints Head restraints can reduce the risk of whiplash injury in the event of impact from the rear Adjust the restraints so that the upper edge is as high as practical To raise pull up on the head restraint To lower depress the button on the post guide and push down on the head restraint BOSzBdbb Adjustable Head Restraint Folding Rear Seat To provide additional storage area the rear seatback can be folded forward Pull on the loops shown in the picture to fold down either or both seatbacks When returning the rear seat back to the upright position 3 be sure the seat back is latched Folding Rear Seats 102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES YOUR VEHICLE waw Folding Rear Seat Center Armrest The rear seat is equipped with a folding armrest with cup The rear cargo area of the vehicle with the rear holders seatbacks in the locked up or folded down position should not be used as a play area by children They could be seriously injured in an accident Children should be seated and using the proper restraint system Folding Rear Seat Armrest ws UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD Then lift the secondary latch located under the front edge To open the hood two latches must be released First pull of the hood near the center and raise the hood the hood release lever located under the left side of the b instrument panel Hood
95. LFUNCTION TRANS ENGINE COOLANT SUPPLEMENTAL PASSENGER DOOR CONVERTIBLE GOMVERTIELE SEE OWNER S 91910970 DIL TEMP TEMPERATURE RESTRAINT SYSTEM AIRBAG OFF TOF DOH TOP UP MANUAL INDICATOR LIGHT Common Icons 6 INTRODUCTION WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures which could result in an accident or bodily injury It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures which could result in damage to your vehicle If you do not read this entire manual you may miss important information Observe all Warnings and Cautions VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Vehicle Identification Number VIN is found on the driver s front corner of the instrument panel visible through the windshield This number also appears on the vehicle registration or title Vehicle Identification Number VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS WARNING Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or death THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS A Word About Your Keys 10 Ignition Key Removal 10 Automatic Transaxle Ignition Interlock System ga n er sea Key In Ignition Reminder Locking Doors With The Key 12 fco 20 MET 12 Replacem
96. M or FM frequen cies pausing for 5 seconds at each listenable station before continuing to the next To stop the search press SCAN a second time INFO Button Press the INFO button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only TIME Button Press the TIME button and the time of day will be displayed In AM or FM mode pressing the TIME button will switch between the time and frequency displays Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE control knob 3 After the hours are adjusted press the right side TUNE control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE control knob Press the TUNE control knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait 5 seconds The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button and selecting SET CLOCK Once in this display follow the above procedure starting at step 2 RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies TUNE Control Turn the right side rotary control clockwise to increase or counter clockwise to decrease the frequency 174 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Se
97. N C E 5 C H E D U L E 5 8 M A T E N A N C E S C H D U L E 5 8 338 SCHEDULE Miles Kilometers 33 000 55 000 36 000 60 000 39 000 65 000 42 000 70 000 45 000 75 000 Change engine oil and oil filter or at 3 months whichever comes first X X X X X Inspect engine air cleaner filter replace if neces sary X Rotate tires Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct stowage Inspect brake linings SCHEDULE 339 Miles Kilometers 48 000 80 000 51 000 85 000 54 000 90 000 57 000 95 000 60 000 100 000 Change engine oil and oil filter or at 3 months whichever comes first X X X X Replace engine air cleaner filter Rotate tires Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct stowage gt gt 2 Change Automatic Transaxle Fluid and Filter Inspect brake linings X gt Replace Spark Plugs 2 4L Engine gt Flush and replace engine coolant at 60 months or 102 000 miles 170 000 km whichever comes first M A A N C E 5 C H D U L 5 8 M A T E N A N C E S C H D U L E 5 8 340 SCHEDULE Miles Kilometers 63 000 105 000 66 000 110 000 6
98. ND OPERATING srca FUEL REQUIREMENTS 2 4L and 2 7L ENGINES Your vehicle is designed to meet all emis sion regulations and provide excellent fuel economy when using high quality regular unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 50000 87 The use of premium gasoline is not recommended The use of premium gaso line will provide no benefit over high quality regular gasoline can impair engine performance and may dam age the engine 3 5L ENGINE The 3 5L engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide satisfac tory fuel economy and performance when using high quality unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 to 89 The manufac turer recommends the use of 89 octane for optimum performance The routine use of premium gasoline is not recommended The use of premium gasoline will provide no benefit over high quality regular gasoline or mid grade gasoline and in some circumstances may result in poorer performance Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine However continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experience these symptoms try another brand of gasoline with the ap propriate octane rating for your engine before consider ing service for the vehicle Over 40 automobile manufacturers around the world have issued and endor
99. NEL 151 is calibrated Calibrate the compass completing one more 360 turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the FLASH THE CAL message displayed in the EVIC turns off The compass will now function normally Manual Compass Calibration If the compass appears erratic inaccurate or abnormal you may wish to calibrate the compass manually Prior to calibrating the compass make sure the proper zone is selected Continue to calibrate the compass manually using the following steps 1 Start the engine and leave the transmission selector in PARK in order to enter the EVIC Programming Menus 2 Press the Step Button Several Times until Personal Settings is displayed in the EVIC window 3 Once in Personal Settings Press the STEP button until Calibrate Compass Yes displays in the EVIC window Press and release the RESET Button and the CAL indicator will come on solid 4 Drive the vehicle slowly completing one or more circles in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL message turns off The compass will now function normally Compass Variance Compass Variance is the difference between magnetic North and Geographic North In some areas of the country the difference between magnetic and geographic North is great enough to cause the compass to give false readings If this occurs the compass variance must be set using the following proce
100. NOTE Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open to allow airbag deploy ment Do not put anything on or around the airbag covers or attempt to open them manually You may dam age the airbags and you could be injured because the airbags are not there to protect you These protective covers for the airbag cushions are de signed to open only when the airbags are inflating The system includes sensors adjacent to both front and rear seat occupants that are calibrated to deploy during an impact severe enough to require airbag occupant protection Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the side airbags the perfor mance could be adversely affected and or objects could be pushed into you causing serious injury If your vehicle is equipped with left and right window bags do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the location of the Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC The area where the side curtain airbag is located should remain free from any obstructions Do not attach cup holders or any other objects on or around the door The inflating side airbag could drive the object into occupants causing serious injury THINGS KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 Airbags inflate in moderate to high speed impacts Along with seat belts and pretensioners front airbags work with the knee bolsters to provide improved protection for the driver an
101. Program ESP 222 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 147 Emergency In Case of Jacking 32 C ae deb ER Ra 274 Jump Starting isses ex ax eet ed 280 OWING iaa eg 283 Emergency Trunk Release 30 Emission Control System Maintenance 291 332 Engine dn beoe RR RR 287 288 289 Break In Recommendations 63 Checking Oil Level 293 Coolant Antifreeze 328 COOMNE edge eS EE b sat a 305 Exhaust Gas Caution 253 Fuel Requirements 250 327 Jump Staring 280 saws lines 293 327 328 Oil Change Interval 294 Oil Filler 22224 22 4 287 288 289 296 Selection xu ww qa gus ER 295 327 Oil Synthetic necesite ain pe tres igs 297 Overheating 272 Temperature Gauge 139 Event Data Recorder 52 Exhaust Gas Caution 64 253 304 Exhaust System gsm eo S 304 Extender Seat Belt 40 Fabric Carte 2221 22 S 315 316 Filler Location Fuel 139 Filters Air Cleaner e RE 640088044408 299 Air Conditioning 200 Engine Fuel pecsi eee 299 Engine Oll s e n mn 297 328 FlashetS ee tw ieu Mea TIAS ERES 272 Hazard W
102. R INSTRUMENT PANEL 197 these conditions are present and the Recirculation Button is pressed the indicator will flash and remain off This tells you that you are unable to go into recirculation mode at this time If you would like to go into Recirculation Mode you must first move your Mode Knob to Panel Panel Floor and then press the Recirculation Button This feature will reduce the possibility of window fogging Manual Operation This system offers a full complement of manual override features which consist of Blower Preferred Automatic Mode Preferred Automatic or Blower and Mode Pre ferred Automatic This means the operator can override the blower the mode or both There is a manual blower range for times when the AUTO setting is not desired The blower can be set to any fixed blower speed by rotating the Blower Control knob on the left NOTE Please read the Automatic Temperature Control Operation Chart that follows for details 198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ww Automatic Temperature Control Operation Operation Full Aulomativ Operalion Blower Preferred Automati Mode Preferred Automatic Set hiower knots da Auto Sec mode knob lo Auto Set lemperature knobs for comfort Set Mower knob io any desired airflaw level other than Auto Set mode knob to Aute Set ismperature knobs for comfort Set mode Knob to desired uir delivery point other than Auto Set Hower knob to
103. RATION AND CELLULAR PHONES Under certain conditions the cellular phone being ON in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the cellular phone antenna This condition is not harmful to the radio If your radio performance does not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the antenna it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during cellular phone operation REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS IF EQUIPPED The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel Reach behind the wheel to access the switches STEERING WHEEL EBiBicae Remote Sound Controls The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a push button in the center Pressing the top of the switch will increase the volume and pressing the bottom of the switch will decrease the volume UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189 The button located in the center of the right hand control will switch modes to Radio or CD The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a push button in the center The function of the left hand control is different depending on which mode you are in The following describes the left hand control operation in each mode Radio Operation Pressing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch will SEEK down for the
104. RSTANDING THE FEATURES YOUR VEHICLE ww Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off CAUTION e Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use i e cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent engine starting Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers vacuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the battery even more quickly Only use these inter mittently and with greater caution After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the generator to recharge the vehicle s battery CIGAR LIGHTER AND ASH RECEIVER The covered ash receiver is located in the instrument panel below the climate control knobs The cigar lighter is located to the right of the ash receiver As a child safety precaution the lighter only operates with the ignition switch ON It heats when pushed in and pops out automatically when ready for use To preserve the heating element do not hold the lighter in the heating position Cup Holder Ash Receiver If Equipped Should your vehicle not come equipped with the instru ment panel cigar lighter and ash receiver an optional ash receiver is available from your authorized dealer and will fit i
105. Refer to separate Video Entertainment System VES Guide w UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187 VIDEO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED The optional VES Video Entertainment System in cludes the following components for rear seat entertain ment e A diagonal seven inch liquid crystal display LCD screen integrated into the center console armrest The screen features brightness control for optimum day time and nighttime viewing 81998156 Opening the Rear Seat Video Entertainment System e The LCD Screen swings up from the rear of the armrest to allow the rear seat passenger s to view the display 841998 18b VES Video Screen e The touch screen radio and DVD player controls allow front seat operation for easy setup in the case of younger rear seat passengers e A battery powered infrared remote control that snaps into a molded compartment in the center console armrest upper storage bin 188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL cO h e Two wireless infrared headsets allow rear seat passen gers to listen to the same or individual audio sources e Audio Video RCA Jacks AUX Jacks on the rear of the center console enable the monitor to display video directly from a video camera connect video games for display on the screen or play music directly from an MP3 player NOTE Refer to your Vehicle Entertainment System VES User Manual for detailed operating instruc tions RADIO OPE
106. SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT 5 STARTING AND OPERATING 6 WHAT DO IN EMERGENCIES 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 10 INDEX c a wo x 9 v uus y x yu v3 xy v e y s Information Provided DEALER INTRODUCTION CONTENTS Introduction 4 Bi Vehicle Identification Number 6 How To Use This Manual 4 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 6 Warnings And Cautions 6 4 INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION This manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your new vehicle It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet and various customer oriented documents You are urged to read these publications carefully Following the instruc tions and recommendations in this manual will help assure s
107. STER PREMIUM 8187bd73 120 MPH Cluster with EVIC INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 1 Fuel Gauge When the ignition switch is in the ON position the pointer will show the level of fuel remaining in the fuel tank 2 Fuel Door Reminder This is a reminder that the Fuel Filler Door is EJ i located on the left side of the vehicle 3 Temperature Gauge The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature Any reading below the red area of the gauge shows that the engine cooling system is operating properly The gauge pointer may show a higher than normal temperature when driving in hot weather up mountain grades in heavy stop and go traffic or when towing a trailer Fuller If the pointer rises to the H red mark the instrument cluster will sound a chime Pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 139 the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H red mark turn the engine off immediately and call for service There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition If your air conditioning is on turn it off The air conditioning system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning off the A C removes this heat You can also turn the Temperature control to maximum heat the Mode control to Floor and the Fan control to High This allows the heater core to act as a sup
108. System If something triggers the alarm and no action is taken to disarm it the system will turn off the horn after 3 minutes turn off all of the visual signals after 15 minutes and then the system will rearm itself To Arm the System 1 Remove the keys from the ignition switch and get out of the vehicle 2 Lock the door using either the power door lock switch or the Keyless Entry Transmitter and close all doors wa THINGS KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 3 The indicator light in the instrument cluster will flash rapidly for 16 seconds This shows that the system is arming During this period if a door is opened the ignition switch is turned ON or the power door locks are unlocked in any manner the system will automatically disarm After 16 seconds the indicator light will flash slowly This shows that the system is fully armed NOTE For added security whenever the Security Alarm is armed the Homelink Garage Door Opener if equipped is disabled as well To Disarm the System Either press the UNLOCK button on the remote keyless entry transmitter or insert a valid sentry key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON START position NOTE The driver s door key cylinder and the trunk button on the keyless entry transmitter cannot arm or disarm the system e The system remains armed during trunk entry Press ing the trunk button will not disarm the system If someone enters the veh
109. T PANEL 149 e Distance To Empty e Elapsed Time e Display Units of Measure in Press the STEP button to cycle through all the Trip Computer functions The Trip Functions mode displays the following information 81960499 e Average Fuel Economy Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset When the fuel economy is reset the display will read RESET or show dashes for two seconds Then the history information will be erased and the averaging will continue from the last fuel average reading before the MENU STEP Button reset Press and release the MENU STEP button e Distance To Empty DTE Trip Functions cns ies 2 2 oo Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with uw D c E the fuel remaining in the tank This estimated distance is STEP determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous v and average fuel economy according to the current fuel tank level DTE cannot be reset through the RESET button e Average Fuel Economy 150 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NOTE Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle regardless of the DTE displayed value e When the DTE value is less than 30 miles 48 km estimated driving distance the DTE display will change to a text display of LOW FUEL This display will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle wil
110. TERMIT TENT FAILURE OUTLET PEDALS SPEED CONTROL ASSIST SYSTEM BRAKE me 2 a WX e 9 2 Q a Mn BRAKE SYSTEM FUEL REAR WINDOW S MASTER LIGHTING BEAM KEY ACTIVATE UPFERANO LOWER HEATED SEAT WINDOW LIFT TIREPRESSURE HILLDESCENT WARNING PARKING INTERMITTENT WIFER WASHER TCH POWER OUTLET AIR HIGH MONITOR CONTROL BRAKE PIVIS NUS m AWDI VY 3 1 FUEL FILL 02 REAR WINDOW WINDSHIELD WASHER FRONTFOGLIGHT HOOD RELEASE LOWER AIR RECIRCULATION CONVERTIBLE TRACTION ALL WHEEL FAILURE OF ANTHLOCK WASHER FLUID LEVEL QUTLET A WINDOW CONTROL DRIVE BRAKING YSTEM 1002 qp s Oy a saa mansa LIFTGATE RELEASE ELECTRONIC BRAKE SYSTEM ENGINE GIL REAR WINDOW TRICALLY PARKLIGHTS REAR FOG LAMP AND LIFTGATE DEFROST AMD _ YENTILATANG FAN WINDOW LOCK THROTTLE FOUR WHEEL WARNING PARKING DEFROST ur OPEN LOWER AIR OUTLET CONTROL GRE BRAKE np uj D Ai o VOKE BATTERY HEATED MIRROR WINDSHIELD INSTUMEHT PANEL SEATBELT SLIDNG DOOR TRUNKIDECK AIRCONINTIONING CHILD SEAT RECOGNITION WARNING GHARGING DEFROST ILLUMINATION RELEASE TETHER AMCHOR BUTTON neh rv 0 A D amp DX LOWER ANCHORS GLOW PLUG POWER YANDSHIELD WIPER SIGE AIRBAG AIRBAG SUDING DOOR EMERGENCY LIGHTER AND TETHER FOR UCONNECT HAZARD STEERING FLUID AMD WASHER RELEASE HANDLE CHILDREN LATE H BUTTON D A ip MA
111. This should be considered as a normal part of the break in and not interpreted as an indication of difficulty SAFETY TIPS Exhaust Gas WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO follow the safety tips below Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle Set the blower at high speed make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control blower switch is set at high speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing etc If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition replace the belt Airbag Light The light should come on and remain on for 6 to 8 seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first THINGS
112. Weather below 20 F or 29 C To insure reliable starting at these temperatures use of an externally powered electric engine block heater available from your dealer is recommended If Engine Fails to Start If the engine fails to start after you have followed the NORMAL STARTING procedure it may be flooded Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it there Crank the engine for no more than 15 seconds This should clear any excess fuel in case the STARTING AND OPERATING 209 engine is flooded Leave the ignition key in the ON After Starting position release the accelerator pedal and repeat the The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine NORMAL STARTING procedure warms up Remote Start System If Equipped Remote start conveniently starts the engine from outside the vehicle by using the Remote Keyless Entry RKE key ae fob while maintaining security system has a targeted throttle b ody inlet Opening an attempt t start range of 328 ft 100 m The vehicle must be locked the pee could deck lid and hood closed and the transmission in Park in personal inju order to start the engine using the Remote Start button on the key fob NOTE Remote start requires Automatic Transaxle CAUTION equipped vehicles To prevent damage to the starter do not crank the How To Use Remote Start engine for more than 15 seconds at a time Wa
113. YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 181 Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pushing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will be displayed for 5 seconds when ignition is off Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone If Equipped Refer to Hands Free Phone in Section 3 of the Owner s Manual Operating Instructions Satellite Radio Mode If Equipped Refer to the Satellite Radio section of the Owner s Manual Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES If Equipped Refer to separate Video Entertainment System VES Guide SALES CODE RER AM FM CD DVD RADIO WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of your radio faceplate Satellite Navigation Radio with CD Player with MP3 Capability combines Global Positioning Syst
114. a collision an unrestrained child even a tiny baby can become a missile inside the vehicle The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could not hold the child no matter how strong you are The child and others could be badly injured Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child s size w THINGS KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 Infants And Small Children There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt Always check the child seat owner s manual to ensure you have the correct seat for your child Use the restraint that is correct for your child e Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward facing in the vehicle until they are at least one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs 9 kg Two types of child restraints can be used rearward facing infant carriers and convertible child seats Both types of child re straints are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system e The infant carrier is only used rearward facing in the vehicle It is recommended for children who weigh up to about 20 Ibs 9 kg Convertible child seats can be used either rearward facing or forward facing in the vehicle Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward facing direction than infant carriers d
115. a is hanging straight down 1 Erase the factory test codes by pressing the two outside buttons Release the buttons when the light in the Universal Transceiver begins to flash about 20 seconds NOTE Step 1 above does not have to be followed to program additional hand held transmitters 2 Choose one of the three Universal Transceiver buttons to program Position the end of your hand held transmit ter 1 3 inches 3 8 cm away from the HomeLink buttons while keeping its indicator light in view Boazi aay Proper Transceiver Training Distance 3 Simultaneously press and hold the HomeLink button that you want to train and the hand held transmitter button Do not release the buttons until Step 4 is complete NOTE Some gate operators and garage door openers may require you to replace this Programming Step 3 with procedures noted under Gate Operator Canadian Pro gramming Gw sssssuwa lt CWsaeasrmrai UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 4 The indicator light in the Universal Transceiver will begin to flash first slowly and then rapidly The rapid flashing indicates successful programming If after 90 seconds the indicator light does not flash rapidly or goes out return to step 1 and repeat the procedure To train the other buttons repeat steps 3 and 4 Be sure to keep your hand held transmitters in case you need to retrain the Universal Transceiver NOTE To program the remaining two HomeLink but tons
116. afe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle NOTE After you read the manual it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient reference and remain with the vehicle when sold so that the new owner will be aware of all safety warnings When it comes to service remember that your dealer knows your vehicle best has the factory trained techni cians and genuine Mopar parts and is interested in your satisfaction WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addition certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain prod ucts of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the table of contents to determine which section contains the information you desire The detailed index at the rear of this manual contains a complete listing of all subjects Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this owner manual INTRODUCTION 5 5 ESP ej BAS ors ELECTR NM STABILITY WATER FUEL REAR WINDDW WENDSHIELD WIPER EXTERIOR BULB HIGH BEAN TURN SIGNALE darc SEAT DOORLOCK ADJUSTABLE ELECTRONIC PROGRAM BRAKC WIPER IK
117. age supported by disc If customer wishes to select a language not listed then scroll down and select other Enter the 4 digit country code using the TUNE control knob to scroll up and down to select the and then push to select Audio Language If Equipped Selecting this item will allow the user to choose a default audio language effective only if language supported by disc If customer wishes to select a language not listed then scroll down and select other Enter the country code using the TUNE control knob to scroll up and down to select the and then push to select Subtitle Language If Equipped Selecting this item will allow the user to choose a default subtitle language effective only if language supported by disc If customer wishes to select a language not listed then scroll down and select other Enter the country code using the TUNE control knob to scroll up and down to select the and then push to select Subtitles If Equipped Selecting this item will allow the user to choose between subtitle OFF or ON Audio DRC If Equipped Selecting this item will allow the user to limit maximum audio dynamic range The default is set to High and under this setting dialogues are played at 11 db higher than if the setting is Normal ww UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 165 Aspect Ratio If Equipped Selecting this item will allow the user to choose between wide screen pan scan and letter
118. ale Lamp will illumi nate in the instrument cluster and an audible chime will be activated when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low The audible chime will sound once every ignition cycle for each condition that it detects In addition the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will display a graphic of the pressure value s with the low tire s flashing STARTING AND OPERATING 245 21 826bed Low Tire Pressure Display NOTE A low spare tire will not cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp to illuminate or the chime to sound Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four active road tire s you should stop as soon as possible and inflate the low tire s that is flashing on the graphic display to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pres sure value The system will automatically update the graphic display of the pressure value s will stop flash ing and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Lamp will extin guish once the updated tire pressure s have been re ceived The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h to receive this infor mation Check TPM System Message The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 60 seconds and an audible chime will sound when a system fault is detected The flash cycle will repeat every ten minutes without an audible chime until the fault condition no longer exists The EVIC will
119. ammed transmitter contact your dealer for details General Information This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with RS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment If your Remote Lock Control fails to operate from a normal distance check for these two conditions 1 Weak batteries in transmitter The expected life of batteries is five years 2 Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower airport transmitter military base and some mobile or CB radios Battery Replacement The recommended replacement battery is CR2032 1 With the transmitter buttons facing down use a flat blade to pry the two halves of the transmitter apart Make sure not to damage the seal during removal S1182c72 Separating Transmitter Halves 2 Remove and replace the batteries Avoid touching the new batteries with your fingers Skin oils may cause battery deterioration If you touch a battery clean it with rubbing alcohol 3 To assemble the transmitter case snap the two halves together THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 Remote Start Sy
120. and tighten the terminals as required M A C E 5 C H E D U L E 5 8 334 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir brake e Check the manual transmission fluid level if clutch master cylinder and manual transaxle and add equipped as needed e Check the coolant level hoses and clamps e Check all lights and all other electrical items for correct operation CAUTION At Each Oil Change Do not check the automatic transaxle fluid It must be check by a trained service technician every 15 000 e Change the engine oil filter e Inspect the exhaust system miles and if required only the recommended fluid be added Refer to the section Fluids Lubricants Inspect the brake hoses And Genuine Parts for the proper fluid e Inspect the CV joints if equipped and front suspen sion components M A T E N A N C E S C H D U L 5 8 SCHEDULE 335 Follow schedule if you usually operate your vehicle under one or more of the following conditions Day or night temperatures are below 32 F 0 C Stop and go driving Extensive engine idling Driving in dusty conditions Short trips of less than 10 miles 16 km More than 50 of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C Trailer towing e Taxi police or delivery s
121. anged if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation See Schedule B in section 8 of this manual for transmission fluid change intervals NOTE Check the automatic transmission fluid level before towing Towing Tips Electronic Speed Control If Equipped Don t use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads 270 STARTING AND OPERATING When using the speed control if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph 16 km h disengage until you can get back to cruising speed Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency Towing Tips Cooling System To reduce potential for engine and transmission over heating take the following actions City Driving When stopped for short periods of time put transmission in neutral and increase engine idle speed Highway Driving Reduce speed Air Conditioning Turn off temporarily Refer to Cooling System Operating information in the Maintenance section of this manual for more informa tion If you have any questions or concerns after reviewing this section please consult your dealer to for full details on the towing capabilities of the vehicle RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND MOTORHOME ETC Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Flat towing with all four wheels on the ground CAUTION DO NOT flat tow this vehicle Damage to the driv etrain will result NOTE
122. anufacturer has installed special TDD Telecommuni cation Devices for the Deaf equipment at its Customer Center Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter TTY in the United States can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1 800 380 CHRY 352 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for your vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unex pected repairs after your manufacturer s new vehicle limited warranty expires The manufacturer stands be hind only the manufacturer s Service Contracts If you purchased a manufacturer s Service Contract you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of your vehicle delivery date If you have any questions about your service contract call the manufacturer s Service Contract Na tional Customer Hotline at 1 800 521 9922 The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer s Service Contract It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer s Service Contract If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer s Service Contract and you require service after your manufactur er s new vehicle limited warranty expires please refer to your contract documents and contact the person listed in those documents We appreciate that you have ma
123. ark plug for use in your vehicle 298 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Catalytic Converter The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emission control device Under normal operating conditions the catalytic con verter will not require maintenance However it is im portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage CAUTION Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In the event of engine malfunction particularly involv ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor mance have your vehicle serviced promptly Contin ued operation of your vehicle with severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat resulting in possible damage to the converter and the vehicle WARNING A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your ex haust system Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact any thing that can burn In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating If this occurs stop the vehicle turn off the engine and allow it to cool Service including a tune
124. arning Turn Signal Flash To Pass Tire Stowage Flexible Fuel Vehicles Cruising Range Engine Oil cien REPE ER weds Fuel Requirements 362 INDEX Maintenance 255 Replacement Parts 255 Starting 255 nk 255 Flooded Engine Starting 208 Floor Console os BA 6312 ES 128 Fluid Capacities i4 ere ke bg eee E 327 Fid Leaks 22 343 48 205 GR PARET EERE 65 Fluid Level Checks Automatic Transmission 312 Brake na ds ean al arto 329 Power Steering 66666 e 329 ll MMC 328 Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts 328 Fog Lights 2 2 2 2222222222 2 107 144 323 Folding Rear Seat 101 102 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle 282 D tn cw ek 250 Adding utet eg 256 Additives isate panei uu bi eR L 2 on 252 Clean 55555555 be RN 251 Filler Cap Gas 139 256 Filler Door Gas Cap 139 Filter Gasoline sides eG e e b EGG PERPE 250 52156 vans coh ey Yep Bel eeu be nes 139 HOSES MF 309 E 140 Octane Rating cose m eR xs 250 328 Requirements 4 226 e deme ds 250 327 System Lloses
125. art out in first or second gear The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low of a vehicle speed If a ratio other than 1st is selected and the vehicle is brought to a stop the transaxle control logic will automatically select the 1st gear ratio Starting out in second gear is helpful in snowy or icy conditions Avoid using speed control when Autostick is en gaged The transaxle will automatically shift up when maxi mum engine speed is reached while Autostick is engaged transaxle shifting will be more noticeable when Auto stick is engaged If a low range is selected and the engine accelerates to the rev limit the transaxle will automatically select the next higher ratio If a downshift would cause the engine to over speed that shift will not occur until it is safe for the engine Mostly the transaxle will stay in the manually selected ratio however If the system detects powertrain overheating the transaxle will revert to the automatic shift mode and remain in that mode until the powertrain cools off 216 STARTING AND OPERATING e If the system detects a problem it will disable the AutoStick mode and the transaxle will return to the automatic mode until the problem is corrected PARKING BRAKE When the parking brake is applied with the BRAKE ignition on the Brake Light in the instrument cluster will come on NOTE This light when illuminated with parking brake application shows only t
126. at sources such as the exhaust manifold Inspect hose rout ing to be sure hoses do not touch any heat source or moving component that may cause heat damage or mechanical wear Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or collapsed Inspect all hose connections such as clamps and cou plings to make sure the are secure and no leaks are present Components should be replaced immediately if there is any evidence of degradation that could cause failure Fuel System Connections Electronic Fuel Injection high pressure fuel systems are designed with tubes and special connects connections and clamps which have unique material characteristics to provide adequate sealing and resist attack by deterio rated gasoline You are urged to use only the manufactures specified tubes connections and clamps or their equivalent in material and specification in any fuel system servicing 310 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Brake System In order to assure brake system performance all brake system components should be inspected periodically Suggested service intervals can be found in the Mainte nance Section WARNING Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly an accident Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You wouldn t have your full braking capacity in an emergency Brake And Pow
127. aterial Standard MS 6395 American Petroleum Institute API Engine Oil Identification Symbol This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils 296 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE vs Engine Oil Viscosity SAE Grade SAE 10W 30 engine oil for 3 5L engines is recom SAE 5W 20 engine oil for 2 4L and 2 7L engines is mended for all operating temperatures ENGINE OIL VISCOSITY CHART recommended for all operating temperatures ENGINE OIL VISCOSITY CHART 5W 20 Preferred 1 20 0 10 20 328 20 18 12 7 06 18 27 F 20 0 10 20 37 699 809 100 29 18 42 7 o 167 27 38 Temperature range anticipated before next change Temperature range anticipated before next ofl change 5W 20 Oil Viscosity Chart These engine oils are designed to improve low tempera ture starting and vehicle fuel economy Refer to the engine oil filler cap for the preferred engine oil viscosity grade for each vehicle Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num ber should not be used MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 297 Synthetic Engine Oils There are a number of engine oils being promoted as either synthetic or semi synthetic If you chose to use such a product use only those oils that are American Petroleum Institute API Certified and have t
128. ation mute all mute off call new entry cancel no confirmation prompts pager UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95 pair phone phone pairing pairing phonebook phone book previous record again redial return to main menu return or main menu select phone select send set up phone settings or phone set up towing assistance transfer call try again voice training work yes General Information This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op eration 96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ww SEATS Driver Seat Manual Height Adjuster If Equipped Manual Front Seat Adjustments A lever style height adjustment feature enhances comfort Forward Rearward for petite as well as tall drivers A lever with a ratcheting The adjusting bar is at the front of the seats near the mechanism located on the outboard side of the seat floor Pull the bar up to move the seat to the desired raises and lowers it Total travel is 2 2 in 56 mm position pn Manual Seat Height Adjuster Manual Seat Adjuster After releasing the adjusting bar apply forward and rearwar
129. ation to thieves Always remove key from the ignition and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended Automatic Transaxle Ignition Interlock System This system prevents the key from being removed unless the shift lever is in PARK It also prevents shifting out of PARK unless the key is in the ACC or ON positions and the brake pedal is depressed Key In Ignition Reminder Opening the driver s door when the key is in the ignition sounds a signal to remind you to remove the key NOTE With either front door open and the key in the ignition both the power door locks and Remote Keyless Entry RKE will not function 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Locking Doors With The Key There is only one external door lock cylinder which is located in the driver s door only You can insert the key with either side up To lock the door turn the key rearward to unlock the door turn the key forward See Section 7 of this manual for door lock lubrication SENTRY KEY The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unautho rized operation of the vehicle by disabling the engine The system will shut the engine off after 2 seconds of running if an invalid key is used to start the vehicle This system utilizes ignition keys which have an electronic chip transponder embedded into them Only keys that have been programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle The Sentry Key Immobilizer System
130. ay Sirius ID number Press the SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number This number is used to activate deactivate or change the Sirius subscrip tion 186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL SET Button To Set the Push Button Memory When you are receiving a channel that you wish to commit to push button memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this channel and press and release that button If a button is not selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET button the channel will continue to play but will not be stored into push button memory You may add a second channel to each push button by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 This allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into push button memory The channels stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the push button twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will be displayed Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you commit to push button memory 12 Satellite stations Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone If Equipped Refer to Hands Free Phone in Section 3 of the Owner s Manual Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES If Equipped
131. ay on for 3 minutes unless you turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a second time or if the vehicle speed is 5 mph 8 km h or greater NOTE When you turn off the panic alarm by pressing the PANIC button a second time you may have to be closer to the vehicle due to the radio frequency noises of the system To Turn Off Flash Lights With Lock NOTE The Flash Lights With Lock feature can be turned on or off On electronic vehicle information center EVIC equipped vehicles refer to Personal Settings in the EVIC section of this manual On non EVIC equipped vehicles perform the following steps 1 Press the UNLOCK button for 4 to 10 seconds 2 While the UNLOCK button is pressed after 4 sec onds press the LOCK button Release both buttons 3 Test the flash lamps with LOCK feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK button on the key fob with the ignition in the LOCK position and the key removed The Flash Lights On Lock Unlock feature can be reactivated by repeating this procedure 20 THINGS KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ww NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the key fob while you are in the vehicle will activate the Security Alarm Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Security Alarm To Program Transmitters Refer to SENTRY KEY Sentry Key Programming If you do not have a progr
132. base engine coolant antifreeze products Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator This vehicle has not been designed for use with Propylene Glycol based coolants Use of Propylene Glycol based coolants is not recommended Adding Coolant Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant that allows extended maintenance intervals This coolant can be used up to 5 Years or 100 000 miles before replacement To prevent reducing this extended mainte nance period it is important that you use the same coolant throughout the life of your vehicle Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid Organic Addi tive Technology HOAT coolant When adding coolant a minimum solution of 50 rec ommended Mopar Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technol ogy or equivalent in water should be used Use higher concentrations not to exceed 70 if temperatures below 34 F 37 C are anticipated Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized water when mixing the water engine coolant solution The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 307 Please note that it is the owner s responsibility to main tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac cording t
133. be adjusted at any time without affecting automatic operation Automatic Blower Control To engage the Automatic Temperature Control turn the Blower Control Knob Indica tor to AUTO B1a300e5 Automatic Temperature Control Use this control to regulate the temperature of the air in side the passenger compart ment Rotate the outer ring to the desired numerical tem perature 1 13 28 196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Cc sswaaXaha Air conditioning in this system is automatic Pressing the Air Conditioning Control button while in AUTO mode will cause the LED in the control button to flash three times and then turn off This indicates that the system is in AUTO mode and request ing the air conditioning is not necessary NOTE If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected check the front of the A C con denser located in front of the radiator for an accumula tion of dirt or insects Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce air flow to the condenser reducing air conditioning performance Automatic Mode Control Air Direction To engage Automatic Tem perature Control turn the se lector fully left to AUTO 1 13 27 system will automatically control recircu lation However pressing the Recirculation Control button will temporarily put the system in recirculation mod
134. begin with Programming Step Two Do not repeat Step One NOTE If your garage door opener fails to respond to the programmed HomeLink Universal Transceiver and your garage door opener is manufactured after 1995 it may have a multiple security code system rolling code system If your garage door opener is the rolling code type please proceed to the heading Programming A Rolling Code System Programming A Rolling Code System On garage door openers with the Rolling Code feature the transmitter code changes after each use to prevent the copying of your code NOTE The assistance of asecond person may make the following programming procedure quicker and easier 1 Locate the training button on the garage door motor head unit The exact location and color of the button may vary by garage door opener manufacturer If you have difficulty in locating the training button check your garage door opener manual or call 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www homelink com 2 Press and hold the training button on the garage door opener head unit This will activate the training light NOTE After completing step 2 you have 30 seconds to start step 3 3 Return to the Universal Transceiver in the vehicle and firmly press and release the garage door button Press and release the button a second time to complete the 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES YOUR VEHICLE ww training process Some garage do
135. bility could cause an accident Al ways use radial ply tires in sets of four or 6 in case of trucks with dual rear wheels Never combine them with other types of tires Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in the tread area because of sidewall flexing Consult your authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs Compact Spare Tire If Equipped The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with radial tires It is engineered to be used on your style vehicle only Since this tire has limited tread life the original tire should be repaired or replaced and rein stalled at the first opportunity WARNING Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use only With these tires do not drive more than 50 mph 80 km h Temporary use spare tires have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced Be sure to follow the warnings which apply to your spare Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control STARTING AND OPERATING 239 The limited use spare ize for tempo The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use on your vehicle This tire is identified by a limited use spare tire warning label located on the limited use spare tire and wheel assembly This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle but it is not Installation of this limit
136. book entry that you wish to edit Next choose the number designation home work mobile or pager that you wish to edit When prompted recite the new phone number for the phone book entry that you are editing After you are finished editing an entry in the phone book you will be given the opportunities to edit another entry in the phonebook call the number you just edited or return to the main menu Phonebook Edit can be used to add another phone number to a name entry that already exists in the phonebook For example the entry John Doe may have a mobile and a home number but you can add John Doe s work number later using the Phonebook Edit feature Delete Entries in the UConnect Phonebook NOTE Editing phone book entries is recommended when vehicle is not in motion e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Delete e After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu you will then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish to delete You can either say the name of a phone book entry that you wish to delete or you can say List Names to hear a list of the entries in the phone book 80 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE from which you choose To select one of the entries from the list press the Voice Recognition button while the UConnect system is playing the desired entry and say Delete e After you enter
137. buckle it This should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and should not be played with and never leave your child unattended in the vehicle Installing the LATCH Compatible Child Restraint System We urge that you carefully follow the directions of the manufacturer when installing your child restraint Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here Again carefully follow the installation instructions that were provided with the child restraint system The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars NA located at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seat back and are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion surfaces addition there are tether strap anchorages AP behind each rear seating position located in the panel between the rear seat back and the rear window These tether strap anchorages are under a plastic cover with this symbol on it Many but not all restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps on each side with each having a hook or connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension in the strap Forward facing toddler restraints and some rear facing infant restraints will also be equipped with
138. by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pres sure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 141 As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accord ingly when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a signifi cantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability NOTE The Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System low tire pressure telltale The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp will illumi nate in the instrument cluster and an audible chime will be activated when one or more tire pressures is low The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp wil
139. cally from any position The sunroof will open fully then stop automatically This is called Express Open During Express Open operation any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof Closing Sunroof Manual To Close the sunroof from an open or vent position press and hold the switch forward The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically Release the switch to stop sun roof travel at any point Venting Sunroof Express Press and release the V button and the sunroof will open to the vent position This is called Express Vent Closing Sunroof Express Press the switch forward and release and the sunroof will close automatically from any position The sunroof will close fully then stop automatically This is called Express Close During Express Close operation any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof Auto Sunroof Express with Anti Pinch Protection If Equipped During express closing anytime an obstacle that restricts glass movement is detected the motor will stop and reverse travel to avoid pinching the object WARNING There is no anti pinch protection when the sunroof is almost closed To avoid personal injury be sure to clear your arms hands fingers and all objects from the sunroof path before closing UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 Sunshade Operation The sunshade can be opened manually However the sunshade will open automatically as
140. cedure and follow the prompts Voice Recognition VR e Always wait for the beep before speaking e Speak normally without pausing just as you would speak to a person sitting approximately eight 8 feet away from you w UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89 e Make sure that no one other than you is speaking during a voice recognition period e Performance is maximized under low to medium blower setting low to medium vehicle speed low road noise e smooth road surface fully closed windows e dry weather condition e Even though the system is designed for users speaking in North American English French and Spanish ac cents the system may not always work for some e When navigating through an automated system such as voice mail or when sending a page at the end of speaking the digit string make sure to say Send e Storing names in phone book when vehicle is not in motion is recommended e It is not recommended to store similar sounding names in the UConnect phone book e UConnect phone book nametag recognition rate is 3 optimized for the person who stored the name in the phone book e You can say letter O for 0 zero 800 must be spoken eight zero zero e Even though international dialing for most number combinations is supported some shortcut dialing number combinations may not be supported Far End Audio Performance e Audio quality is maximized under
141. ck number when playing e Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS if equipped e Navigation system screens if equipped Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Displays When the appropriate conditions exist the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC displays the following messages e Turn Signal On with a continuous warning chime e Left Front Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime e Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime 148 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Right Front Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime RKE Remote Keyless Entry Battery Low with a single chime Memory 1 2 Profile Set Memory 1 2 Profile Recall Memory System Disabled Vehicle Not In Park with a single chime Memory System Disabled Seat Belt Buckled with a single chime Personal Settings Not Available Vehicle Not in Park Left Right Front Door Ajar one or more with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph Left Right Rear Door Ajar one or more with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph Door s Ajar with a single chime if vehicle is in motion Trunk Ajar with a single chime Low Washer Fluid with a single chime Headlights On Key In Ignition EVIC Functions The 2nd MENU STEP and 3rd RESET buttons of the center instrument panel switch bank are used for EVIC Functions UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMEN
142. cle and if the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert will alert the driver to buckle their seat belt The driver should also instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts Once the warning is triggered the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert will continue to chime and flash the Seat Belt Warning Light for 96 seconds or until the driver s seat belt is buckled w THINGS KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 The Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert will reacti vated if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h Belt Alert Programming BeltAlert can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by following these steps NOTE The following steps must occur within the first 60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON or START position DaimlerChrysler does not recom mend deactivating the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert 1 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and buckle the driver s seat belt 2 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and wait for the Seat Belt Warning Light to turn off 3 Within 60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the ON position unbuckle and then re buckle the driver s seat belt at least three times within 10 seconds ending with the seat belt buckled NOTE Watch for the Seat Belt Warning Light to turn on while unbuckling and
143. cle will be disabled for two seconds after receipt of a valid remote start request NOTE When the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode power window and sunroof operation are disabled for security The following conditions must be met before the engine will remote start e Automatic Transaxle in Park e doors are closed e Hood is closed Hazard Switch is off Brake Switch is inactive e Key is not in the ignition wF THINGS KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 e Battery is at an acceptable charge level WARNING For personal security and safety in the event of an DOOR LOCKS accident lock the vehicle doors as you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle e Panic button on key fob is not depressed Manual Door Locks Use the manual door lock plunger to lock the doors from inside the vehicle If the plunger is down when the door is closed the door will lock Therefore make sure the WARNING keys are not inside the vehicle before closin the door When leaving the vehicle always remove the key from the ignition lock and lock your vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe personal inju ries and death Manual Lock Plunger 24 THINGS KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ww asUsw sssaur raai CAUTION An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves Always rem
144. ct the engine or vehicle performance These items should be inspected if a malfunction is observed or suspected Engine Oil Checking Oil Level To assure proper engine lubrication the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level Check the oil level at regular intervals such as every fuel stop The best time to check the engine oil level is about 5 minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Do not check oil level before starting the engine after it has sat overnight Checking engine oil level when the engine is cold will give you an incorrect reading 294 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE w sOO tmm CAUTION Do not overfill the engine Overfilling the engine as indicated by the range markings as described above on the engine oil dipstick will cause oil aeration which can lead to loss of oil pressure and an increase in oil temperature This could damage your engine 818158 4 Engine Oil Dipstick Gasoline Engines Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground and only when the engine is hot will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Maintain the oil level between the range markings on the dipstick The range markings will consist of a crosshatch zone that says SAFE or a cross hatch zone that says MIN at the low end of the range and MAX at the high end of the range Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at the low end of the indicated range will result in the oil level at the full e
145. d ignite and damage the converter and vehicle If the vehicle has a dis charged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from another vehicle This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly so follow this procedure carefully Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output that exceeds 12 volts WHAT DO IN EMERGENCIES 281 1 Wear eye protection and remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical contact 2 When boosting from a battery in another vehicle park that vehicle within booster cable reach but without letting the vehicles touch Set parking brake place auto matic transaxle in PARK and turn ignition to OFF for both vehicles WARNING Do not permit vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result 3 Turn off the heater radio and all unnecessary electrical loads 4 Remove the protective cover over the remote jump start positive battery post in the engine compartment Connect one end of the jumper cable to the positive battery post Connect the other end of the same cable to the positive terminal of the booster battery Refer to the following illustration for jump starting connections 5 Connect the other cable first to the negative terminal of the booster battery and then to the engine ground of the vehicle with the disc
146. d body pressure to be sure the seat is latched w UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97 Reclining Bucket Seats WARNING The recliner control is on the side of the seat To recline lean forward slightly before lifting the lever then lean e Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is back to the desired position and release the lever Lean dangerous The sudden movement of the seat forward and lift the lever to return the seatback to its could cause you to lose control The seat belt normal position might not be properly adjusted and you could be injured Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured Use the recliner only when the vehicle is parked Seat Back Fold Forward 98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES YOUR VEHICLE wn Lumbar Support If Equipped This feature allows you to increase or decrease the amount of lumbar support The control lever is located on the outboard side of the driver s seatback Turn the control lever downward to increase and upward to decrease the desired amount of lumbar support Lumbar Support Power Seats If Equipped The power seat switches are on the outboard side of the seat near the floor Use the front switch to move the seat up down forward rearward or to tilt the
147. d front passenger Side airbags also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection The seat belts are designed to protect you in many types of collisions The front airbags deploy in moderate to severe frontal collisions If your vehicle is equipped the side airbag on the crash side of the vehicle is triggered in moderate to severe side collisions In certain types of collisions both the front and side airbags may be trig gered However even in collisions where the airbags work you need the seat belts to keep you in the right position for the airbags to protect you properly Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying airbag 1 Children 12 years old and under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat Infants in rear facing child restraints should NEVER ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger front airbag An airbag deployment can cause severe injury or death to infants in that position Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly see Section on Child Restraints should be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt positioning booster seats Older children who do not use child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm If a child from 1 to 12 years old must ride in the front passenger seat because
148. d the ESP activation STARTING AND OPERATING 225 POWER STEERING The standard power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces The system will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost If for some reason the power assist is interrupted it will still be possible to steer your vehicle Under these condi tions you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers NOTE Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system Upon initial start up in cold weather the power steering pump may make noise for a short amount of time This is due to the cold thick fluid in the steering system This noise should be considered normal and does not in any way damage the steering system WARNING Continued operation with reduced power steering assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others Service should be obtained as soon as possible CAUTION Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering fluid temperature and it should be avoided when possible Damage to the power steering pump may occur 226 STARTING AND OPERATING DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES Acceleration Rapid accelerat
149. de a major investment when you purchased your new vehicle Your dealer has also made a major investment in facilities tools and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with your ownership experience You ll be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns WARRANTY INFORMATION U S Vehicles Only See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and provisions of DaimlerChrysler s warranties applicable to this vehicle MOPAR PARTS Mopar fluids lubricants parts and accessories are available from your dealer They will help you keep your vehicle operating at its best ww s lt sx6ws lt ww TFsw IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 353 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In the 50 United States and Washington D C If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause crash or cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administra tion NHTSA in addition to notifying the manufacturer If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your dealer and the manufacturer To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 or go to http www safercar gov or wri
150. de of black sidewall The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire tires as mounted on the vehicle If the TIN is not found on however the date code may only be on one side Tires the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard side with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including of the tire date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA Code representing the tire manufacturing location 2 digits L9 Code representing the tire size 2 digits ABCD Code used by tire manufacturer 1 to 4 digits 03 Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured 2 digits 03 means the 3rd week 01 Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured 2 digits 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000 tire manufacturers were only required to have 1 number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured Example 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 Tire Loading and Tire Pressure Tire Placard Location NOTE The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on either the face of the driver s door or the driver s side B pillar 91124090 Tire Placard Location Tire and Loading Inf
151. display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF CD MODE Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM or FM Button CD MODE Switches the Radio to the Radio mode RND Button Random Play Button CD MODE Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly selected track Press the RND button a second time to stop Random Play 168 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL aO Notes On Playing MP3 WMA Files The radio can play MP3 WMA files however acceptable MP3 WMA file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 WMA files pay attention to the following restrictions Supported Media Disc Types MP3 WMA file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 WMA DVD Video DVD R DVD RW DVD R DVD RW and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file
152. display the CHECK TPM SYSTEM message for 3 seconds This text message is then followed by a graphic with displayed for the pressure value indicating which of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sen sor s is not being received 246 STARTING AND OPERATING w 41826bd7 Check TPM System Display If the ignition key is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists If the system fault no longer exists the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will no longer flash and the CHECK TPM SYS text message will no longer display NOTE If your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare wheel and tire assembly it does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor Therefore it will not be monitored by the Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS In the event that the compact spare tire is swapped with a low pressure road tire the next ignition key cycle will still show the Tire Pressure Monitoring Lamp to be ON a chime to sound and the Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC will still show the low tire pressure value flashing on the graphic display However driving the vehicle for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h will display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM text message on the EVIC This text message will then be followed by a graphic with in place of the flashing low pressure value For every subsequent key cycle the Tire Pressure Monitoring Lamp will be ON a chime will so
153. djust for annoying head light glare from vehicles behind you Push in the button on the face of the mirror to activate the dimming feature Automatic Dimming Mirror 817892 4 w UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES YOUR VEHICLE 71 CAUTION To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean Electric Remote Control Mirrors Both of the outside mirrors can be adjusted by using the remote controls mounted on the driver s door panel A rotary knob selects the left mirror right mirror or off position Power Mirror Switch After selecting a mirror move the knob in the same direction you want the mirror to move When finished return the knob to the center O Off position to guard against accidentally moving a mirror position 72 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ww Mirror Directions Adjusting Side View Mirrors Outside Mirror Driver s Side Adjust the outside mirror to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror Outside Mirror Passenger s Side Adjust the convex outside mirror so you can just see the side of your vehicle in the part of the mirror closest to the vehicle WARNING Vehicles and other objects seen in the right side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they real
154. dlights Parking Lights Instrument Adding Washer Fluid 11 Panel Lights 105 Tilt Telescoping Steering Column 112 Headlight IE Equipped s10 Electronic Speed Control If Equipped 113 13 ae To Set At A Desired Speed 113 1 107 To Deactivate 114 Lights On Reminder 107 TO REMC SPS posites pa Fog Lights If Equipped 107 To Vary The Speed Setting 114 Turn Signals ou ssi eee qa ego ek 108 H5 Highbeam Lowbeam Select Switch 108 DT i ii 7 EE 115 Il Windshield Wipers And Washers 109 The Unversal Windshield Washers 109 HomeLink 115 w smsKsrsrs ww UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 69 Programming A Rolling Code System 117 Wind Buffeting 123 Canadian Programming Gate Programming 118 Sunroof 123 Using Homelink pragas pat 118 Ignition Off Operation Erasing HomeLink Buttons 118 Wi Electrical Power Outlets Reprogramming a Single HomeLink Button 119
155. does not need to be armed or activated Operation of the system is automatic regardless of whether or not the vehicle is locked or unlocked During normal operation the Theft Alarm Immobilizer Light will come on for three 3 seconds immediately after the ignition switch is turned on for a bulb check Afterwards if the bulb remains on this indicates a problem with the electronics If the bulb begins to flash after the bulb check this indicates that an invalid key has been used to start the vehicle Both of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two 2 seconds of running Keep in mind that a key which has not been pro grammed is also considered an invalid key even if it is cut to fit the ignition lock cylinder for that vehicle If the Theft Alarm Immobilizer Light comes on during normal vehicle operation the vehicle has been running for longer than 10 seconds a fault has been detected in the electronics and the vehicle should be serviced as soon as possible NOTE e The Sentry Key Immobilizer System is not compatible with remote starting systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection THINGS KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 e Exxon Mobil Speed Pass additional Sentry Keys or any other transponder equipped components on the same keychain will not cause a key related tran sponder fault unless the additional part is phys
156. dure NOTE Magnetic materials and cell phones should be kept away from the top of the Instrument Panel This is where the compass sensor is located 152 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL id Procedure to Update the Variance w 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position while leaving the transmission selector in PARK 2 Press the Step Button Several Times until Personal Settings is displayed in the EVIC window 3 Once in Personal Settings Press the STEP button until Compass Variance and the current value displays in the EVIC window 4 Press and release the RESET Button to increment the Variance Value by one one button press per update until the proper variance zone is selected according to the map NOTE The Variance values will wrap around from 15 back to 1 The Default Variance is Zone 8 5 Press and release the RESET button to exit Press the STEP button if you wish to calibrate the compass manu ally see Manual Compass Calibration listed above COMPASS VARIANCE MAP UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 153 Telephone If Equipped EVIC displays this symbol to indicate the Press and release the MENU button until Telephone signal strength of the UConnect phone The displays in the EVIC 7 number of horizontal bars increases as the e ii When the appropriate conditions exist the EVIC pro Signal vides the followi
157. e Anti Lock Brake System ABS Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance To receive the benefit of the system you must apply continuous brak ing pressure during the stopping sequence Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired Once the brake pedal is released the BAS is deactivated 222 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING e BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded The BAS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydro planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Electronic Stability Program ESP If Equipped This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions ESP cor rects for over under steering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counter acting the over under steer condition Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path ESP uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path int
158. e ten minutes This can be used when outside conditions such as smoke odors dust or high humidity are present Activating recircula tion will cause the LED in the control button to illumi nate After ten minutes the system will return to normal AUTO mode function and the LED will turn off NOTE e When the ignition switch is turned OFF the recircula tion feature will be cancelled e cold weather use of the Recirculation mode may lead to excessive window fogging The Recirculation mode is not allowed in the Mix and Defrost modes to improve window clearing operation Recirculation will be disabled automatically if these modes are selected Extended use of recirculation may cause the windows to fog If the interior of the windows begins to fog press the Recirculation button to return to outside air Some temp humidity conditions will cause captured interior air to condense on windows and hamper visibility For this reason the system will not allow Recirculation to be selected while in floor defrost or defrost floor mode Attempting to use the recircula tion while in these modes will cause the LED in the control button to blink and then turn off Most of the time when in Automatic Operation you can temporarily put the system into Recirculation Mode by pressing the Recirculation Button However under certain conditions while in Automatic Mode the system is blowing air out the defrost vents When es UNDERSTANDING YOU
159. e Brake Switch is inactive e Key is not in the ignition e Battery is at an acceptable charge level e Panic button on key fob is not depressed STARTING AND OPERATING 211 AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE e Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has pu n come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed Do not shift from REVERSE PARK or NEUTRAL into any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed e Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal NOTE You MUST press and hold the brake pedal down while shifting out of Park WARNING Tuus 2 Automatic Transaxle Shifter CAUTION It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out of P or N if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the Damage to the transaxle may occur if the following precautions are not observed vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re verse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop 212 STARTING AND OPERATING Brake Transaxle Interlock System This system prevents you from moving the gear shift out of Park and into any gear unless the brake pedal is pressed This system is active only while the ig
160. e desirable to switch to the Partial Off mode by pressing the ESP switch Once the situation requiring ESP to be switched to the Partial Off mode is overcome turn ESP back on by momentarily depressing the ESP Control Switch This may be done while the vehicle is in motion ESP BAS Warning Light and ESP TCS Indicator Light The malfunction indicator for the ESP is combined with the BAS indicator The yellow ESP BAS Warning Lamp and the yellow ESP TCS Indicator Light in the instrument cluster both come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position They should both go out with the engine running If the ESP BAS Warn ing Lamp comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in either the ESP or BAS system or both If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected NOTE e The ESP Indicator Light and the ESP BAS Warning Light come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON e Each time the ignition is turned ON the ESP System will be ON even if it was turned off previously e The ESP Control System will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESP becomes inactive following the maneuver that cause
161. e during hard pro hoses replaced immediately longed braking You could have an accident Brake Master Cylinder The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked WARNING when performing under hood services or immediately if the brake system warning lamp is on Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before brake fluid catching fire removing the cap If necessary add fluid to bring the fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid reservoir Fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear Brake fluid level should be checked when pads are replaced However low fluid level may be not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate the caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed brake fluid as seal damage will result Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed container to avoid contamination from foreign matter Use only manufacturers recommended brake fluid refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type 312 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Automatic Transaxle The automatic transaxle and differential assembly are contained within a single housing All automatic transaxles with the exception of the trans axle with the 3 5L engine which has no dipstick and is dealer service only are equipped with a conventional filler tube and dipstick I
162. e following Religious format types Religious Talk Rel Talk 16 Digit Character Dis Rock Boek Program Type play Soft Soft No program type or un M Soft Rock Soft Rck defined E Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R amp B Adult Hits Adlt Hit Sports Sports Classical Classicl Talk Talk Classic Rock Cls Rock Top 40 Top 40 College College Weather Weather Country Country By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon Foreign Language Language is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency Information Inform station with the same selected Music Type name The Jazz Jazz Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode wwww amwrrrc rrrI s UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 163 If a preset button is activated while in the Music Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items NOTE Use Tune Control Knob to scroll through the entries and push Audio Select button to select an entry and make changes e DVD Enter When the disc is in DVD Menu mode selecting DVD Enter will allow you to play the current highlighted selection Use the remote control to scroll up and down the menu If Equipped e DISC Play Pause You can toggle between playing the DVD or pausing the DVD by pushing the SELECT button If Equipped e DVD Play Options Selec
163. e it SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next channel pausing for 8 seconds before continuing to the next To stop the search press SCAN a second time INFO Button Pressing the INFO button will cycle between Artist Song Title and Composer if available information Also pressing and holding the INFO button for an additional 3 seconds will make the radio display the Song Title all of the time press and hold again to return to normal display RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the direction of the arrows TUNE Control Rotary Turn the right side rotary control clockwise to increase or counter clockwise to decrease the channel MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for 5 seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE control knob within 5 seconds will allow the program format type to be selected Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music type By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type function is active the radio will be tuned to the next channel with the same selected Music Type name If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the following items Displ
164. e less stable It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire 5 Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right using the swivel wrench Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is obtained to install the spare tire Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability 6 Remove the wheel nuts and pull the wheel and wheel covers where applicable off the hub Install the spare wheel and wheel nuts with the cone shaped end of the nuts toward the wheel Lightly tighten the nuts To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 279 WARNING To avoid possible personal injury handle the wheel covers with care to avoid contact with any sharp edges NOTE The wheel cover is held on the wheel by the wheel nuts When reinstalling original wheel properly align the wheel cover to the valve stem place the wheel cover onto the wheel then install the wheel nuts 7 Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left 8 Finish tightening the nuts Push down on the wrench while tightening the wheel nuts Alternate nuts until each nut has been tightened twice Correct wheel nut torque is 100 ft 165 135 If you doubt that you have tightened the nuts correctly have them checked with a torque wrench by your dealer or at a se
165. e must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undes ired operation 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES YOUR VEHICLE ww WARNING HomeLink is a trademark owned by Johnson Controls Inc A moving garage door can cause injury to people and pets in the path of the door People or pets could be seriously or fatally injured Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a stop and reverse feature as required by federal safety standards This includes most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982 Do not In the event that you are still having programming difficulties questions or comments call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or if you have access on the Internet at www homelink com for information or assistance WARNING Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are training the Universal Transceiver Do use a garage door opener without these safety features it could cause injury or death Call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www homelink com for safety information or as sistance not train the transceiver if people or pets are in the path of the door or gate A moving door or gate can cause serious injury or death to people and pets or damage to objects Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide a dan gerous gas Do not run the vehicle s exhaust while training the transceiver Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death
166. e pressure inside a garage especially in the winter Example If garage temperature 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature 32 F 0 C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi 21 kPa which equals 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C for this outside temperature condition Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40 kPa during operation DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds within posted speed limits Where speed limits or condi tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera tion Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures 238 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi mum load is dangerous The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail You could have a serious accident Don t drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph 120 km h Radial Ply Tires WARNING Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly The insta
167. e services listed in bold type must be done at the times or mileages specified to assure the continued proper functioning of the emission control system These and all other maintenance services included in this manual should be done to provide best vehicle performance and reliability More frequent main tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip driving Inspection and service also should be done any time a malfunction is suspected NOTE Maintenance replacement or repair of the emission control devices and systems on your vehicle may be performed by any automotive repair establish ment or individual using any automotive part which has been certified pursuant to U S EPA or in the State of California California Air Resources Board regulations MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES There are two maintenance schedules that show the required service for your vehicle First is Schedule B It is for vehicles that are operated under the conditions that are listed below and at the beginning of the schedule e Day or night temperatures are below 32 F 0 C Stop and go driving e Extensive engine idling e Driving in dusty conditions e Short trips of less than 10 miles 16 km More than 50 of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C e Trailer towing e Taxi police or delivery service commercial service e Off road
168. e the tether strap to provide the most direct path Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat for the strap between the anchor and the child seat If belt your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head The passenger seat belts are equipped with either cinch restraints raise the head restraint and where possible ing latch plates or automatic locking retractors which are route the tether strap under the head restraint and designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip 62 THINGS KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE wc Pulling up on the shoulder portion of the lap shoulder belt will tighten the belt The cinching latch plate will keep the belt tight however any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary Seat belts with an automatic locking retractor have a distinctive label on the seat belt webbing The seat belt must be in the automatic locking mode in order to enable a child restraint to be tightly installed Refer to Auto matic Locking Mode in this section for details A locking clip should not be necessary once the automatic locking feature is enabled Position the shoulder and lap belt on the child restraint The automatic locking retractor is activated by first attaching the child seat then pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor then allowing back in Tighten webbing To
169. e vehicle In a sudden stop or collision it could strike the occupants or seat backs and cause serious personal injury NOTE For additional information refer online to www seatcheck org Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor age system called LATCH which stands for Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren The LATCH system provides for the installation of the child restraint without using the vehicle seat belt The outboard rear seating positions have lower anchorages that are capable of accommodating LATCH compatible child seats having flexible webbing mounted lower attachments Child seats with fixed lower attachments must be installed in the outboard positions only Regardless of the specific type of lower attachment NEVER install LATCH compatible child seats such that two seats share a com mon lower anchorage If you are installing LATCH compatible child restraints in adjacent rear seating positions you can use the LATCH anchors or the vehi cle s seat belt for the outboard position but you must use 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ww the vehicle s seat belt at the center position If your child restraints are not LATCH compatible you can only in stall the child restraints using the vehicle s seat belts Please refer to Installing the Child Restraint System for typical installation instructions Rear Seat LATCH Anchors Child restraints
170. eat w THINGS KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 Airbag Deployment Sensors and Controls Occupant Restraint Controller ORC The Occupant Restraint Controller System ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system required for this vehicle The ORC determines if a frontal collision is severe enough to require the airbags to inflate Based on the sensor signals a central electronic Occupant Restraint Controller ORC deploys the front airbags side inflat able airbag curtains seat mounted side Thorax airbags and front seat belt pretensioners as required for each type of impact The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or RUN positions These include all of the items listed above except the steering wheel and column instrument panel and passenger knee bolsters If the key is in the OFF position in the ACC position or not in the ignition the airbags are not on and will not inflate The ORC contains a backup power supply system that will deploy the airbags even if the battery loses power or becomes disconnected prior to deployment Also the ORC turns on the AIRBAG warning light in the instrument panel for 6 to 8 seconds for a self check when the ignition is first turned on After the self check the AIRBAG warning light will turn off If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system it turns on the AIRBAG warning light either m
171. eather warm the windshield with defroster before and during wind shield washer use 818 240 Mist Control w ss UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES YOUR VEHICLE 111 Windshield Wiper Operation Turn to the second detent for low wiper speed and the third detent for high wiper speed 18fc ob Wiper Control Speed Sensitive Intermittent Wiper System Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause be tween cycles desirable Select the delay interval by turning the end of the lever Rotate the knob upward to decrease the delay time and downward to increase the delay time The delay can be regulated from a maximum of approximately 18 seconds between cycles to a cycle every second NOTE The wiper delay times depend on vehicle speed If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph 16 km h delay times will be doubled NOTE If the front wiper is operating when the ignition is turned off the wiper will automatically return to the Park position When the vehicle is restarted the wipers will resume operation Adding Washer Fluid The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers is located in the engine compartment and should be checked for fluid level at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent not radiator antifreeze and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water Refer to the appropriate engine diagram Section 7 Mai
172. ecause the MIL symbol is on with the engine running REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine Mopar parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to in sure the designed performance Damage or failures caused by the use of non Mopar parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer s warranty DEALER SERVICE Your dealer has the qualified service personnel special tools and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle Refer to these manuals before attempting any procedure yourself NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 293 WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent me chanic MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed maintenance intervals there are other items that should operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance However if a malfunction of these items does occur it could adversely affe
173. ecial mug is included with this feature and is specially designed to work best with this system ssaasxsswwwsc lt wwsi wcw UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES YOUR VEHICLE 131 Rear Bottle Holders WARNING There are built in bottle holders located in both rear door trim panels If containers of hot liquid are placed in the bottle holder they can spill when the door is closed burning the occupants Be careful when closing the doors to avoid injury Rear Bottle Holder Information Provided DEALER UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS E Instrument Panel Features 136 Telephone If Equipped Bl Instrument Cluster Base 137 Navigation If Equipped Bl Instrument Cluster Premium 138 Personal Settings Il Instrument Cluster Descriptions 139 i k itis EB Electronic Vehicle Information Center H Setting The Analog Clock 157 EVIC If Equipped 147 Wl Electronic Digital Clock 158 Electronic Vehicle Information Center Clock Setting 158 m ll Radio General Information 158 I SMa Radio Broadcast Signals 158 Trip FUNCHONS 4555 dese ER Ear 149 Two Types Of Signals 158 TO REC
174. ed Control Lever The CRUISE indicator in the instrument cluster will illuminate To turn the system OFF push the ON OFF button a second time CRUISE indicator will turn off The system should be turned OFF when not in use NOTE The Electronic Speed Control System will auto matically turn itself off when the ignition key is turned to the OFF position WARNING Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have an accident Always leave the system OFF when you are not using it To Set At A Desired Speed When the vehicle has reached the desired speed press down on the lever and release Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed NOTE e The vehicle must be traveling at least 25 mph 40 km h for the speed control to set 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES YOUR VEHICLE ww e The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pressing the SET lever To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal pulling the speed control lever towards you CANCEL or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate speed control without erasing the set speed memory Pressing the ON OFF button or turning off the ignition switch erases the set speed memory To Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed pus
175. ed use spare tire affects vehicle handling Since it is not the same tire replace or repair the original tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity Prolonged use of limited use spare or an incorrect tire size on either front wheel may damage transaxle differential and result in loss of vehicle mobility Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare Do not install more than one compact spare tire wheel on the vehicle at any given time WARNING The limited use spare tires are for emergency use CAUTION only Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling With this tire do not drive more than 60 mph 100 km h Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressure listed on either your tire placard or limited use spare tire and wheel assembly Replace or repair the original tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control Because of the reduced ground clearance do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the compact spare installed Damage to the vehicle may result 240 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING Prolonged use of limited use spare or incorrect tire size of front wheel may damage the transaxle dif ferential and result in loss of vehicle mobility and could result
176. em based navigation system with an integrated color screen to provide maps turn identification selection menus and instructions for selecting a variety of destina tions and routes 182 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL au This radio has a hard drive CD s can be ripped to the hard drive and the map data comes loaded on the hard drive Refer to your Navigation User s Manual for detailed operating instructions Operating Instructions Satellite Radio Refer to your Navigation User s Manual for detailed operating instructions Clock Setting Procedure The GPS receiver used in this system is synchronized to the time data being transmitted by the GPS satellite The satellites clock is Greenwich Mean Time GMT This is the worldwide standard for time This makes the sys tem s clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone and daylight savings information is set To manually set the clock change the time zone or change daylight savings information use a ball point pen or similar object to press the hour H or minute M buttons on the radio The Setup screen appears Setting the Clock 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON or ACC position Using the tip of a ballpoint pen or similar object press either the H button on the faceplate to change the hour or the M button on the faceplate to change the minute 2 The time setting will increase each time you press the button Holding either button in will fast forward
177. ended by the driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle When the actual path does not match the intended path ESP applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition Oversteer when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position e Understeer when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position ESP TCS Indicator Light The ESP TCS Indicator Light located in the instrument cluster starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESP system becomes active The ESP TCS Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is active If the ESP TCS Indicator Light begins to flash during acceleration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions STARTING AND OPERATING 223 WARNING e Electronic Stability Program ESP cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions ESP cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ESP equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize t
178. ent 13 Sentry Key Programming 13 General Information 14 Security Alarm System If Equipped 14 Rearming Of The System 14 To Arm The System To Disarm The System Security System Manual Override H Illuminated Entry System If Equipped lll Remote Keyless Entry To Unlock The Doors To Lock The Doors To Unlatch The Trunk Using The Express Down Window Feature If Equipped To Turn Off Flash Lights With Lock 8 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE wawan To Program Transmitters 20 Reset Express Up 29 General Information 20 Wind Buffeting 29 Battery Replacement 20 Release RR REX RR CC X 29 Remote Start System If Equipped 21 W Trunk Safety Warning 30 How To Use Remote Start 21 Trunk Internal Emergency Release 30 Locks 22e REN Y RR 23 WW Occupant Restraints 31 Manual Door 5 23 Lap Shoulder Belts 32 Power Door Locks 24 Adj
179. eplace Spark Plugs 2 4L Engine X Replace Spark Plugs 2 7L and 3 5L Engines X Replace the accessory drive belt every 120 000 X miles 200 000 km M A A N C E 5 C H E D U L E 5 8 348 SCHEDULE A Inspection and service should also be performed anytime a malfunction is observed or suspected Retain all re ceipts You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only that service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent me chanic M A T E N A N C E S C H D U L E 5 8 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS I Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Reporting Safety Defects 353 Your Vehicle s s 4 nm dene RR 350 353 Prepare For The Appointment on IN Publication Order 353 Prepare A Liste Ree a e ae 350 lll Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire Be Reasonable With Requests 350 Quality Grades 354 H If You Need Assistance 350 Treadwear sec eec Fere E Warranty Information U S Vehicles Only 352 Traction Grades asia rex Re ea B Mopar Parts
180. er Steering System Hoses When servicing the vehicle for scheduled maintenance inspect the surface of the hoses and nylon tubing for evidence of heat and mechanical damage Hard and brittle rubber cracking tears cuts abrasions and exces sive swelling suggest deterioration of the rubber Particu lar attention should be made to examining those hose surfaces nearest to high heat sources such as the exhaust manifold Inspect all hose clamps and couplings to make sure they are secure and no leaks are present Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or collapsed NOTE Often fluids such as oil power steering fluid and brake fluid are used during assembly plant opera tions to ease the assembly of hoses to couplings There fore oil wetness at the hose coupling area is not neces sarily an indication of leakage Actual dripping of hot fluid when systems are under pressure during vehicle operation should be noted before a hose is replaced based on leakage NOTE Inspection of brake hoses should be done whenever the brake system is serviced and at every engine oil change MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 311 WARNING WARNING Worn brake hoses can burst and cause brake failure Use of a brake fluid that may have a lower initial You could have an accident If you see any signs of boiling point or unidentified as to specification may cracking scuffing or worn spots have the brake result in sudden brake failur
181. er and Tongue Weight Always load a trailer with 60 to 65 of the weight in the front of the trailer This places 10 of the Gross Trailer Weight GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side which will cause loss of control of vehicle and trailer Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer accidents Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch 81546 40 Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle e The tongue weight of the trailer e The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle e The weight of the driver and all passengers NOTE Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle Also additional factory installed options or dealer installed options STARTING AND OPERATING 265 must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle Refer to the Tire and Loading Information plac ard in the Tire Safety Information Section of this manual for the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle CAUTION Incorrect tongue weight could result in increased yaw or vehicle instability A negative tongue weight could unload the rear suspension of the tow vehicle decreasing vehicle stability Negative tongue weight
182. eral Information 235 High Speed asm eer a 237 Inflation Pressures 236 JACKING Ree E 274 Lifeof Ties vso PEK asa 241 Load Capacity 231 232 Pressure Monitor System TPMS 243 Quality Grading 354 Radial hws Replacement ica cea Saeed Safely RE doc es SIZES c e xU X ae PORES Gesa 370 INDEX Spare lite Eae T 274 240 Tread Wear Indicators 240 Tongue Weight Trailer Weight 264 TOWING Geeks bee PER RS P RR EY RR 261 Disabled Vehicle 283 GUlde sas ead 263 Recreational sse nesa RR a wa aa 270 Weight ceu asas ro qe RA 263 lracton ier aee sa gare RETE nS 226 Trailer Towing sx eoe eet es 261 Cooling System Tips 270 Hitches 2225255 buco ae Re d ds 263 Minimum Requirements 265 Trailer and Tongue Weight 264 Mp m a ansa 268 Trailer Towing Guide 263 Trailer Weight 263 Transaxle 432202222224 iius desa 21 Automatic 10 207 211 312 AUtOSHC ng cadi Sache Has cece ee 214 Operation ce ke ered ROS We 211 OverdriVe s de Erase Re 213 Selection
183. ervice commercial service e Off road or desert operation e Heavy Loading NOTE If ANY of these apply to you then change your engine oil every 3 000 miles 5 000 km or 3 months whichever comes first and follow schedule of the Maintenance Schedules section of this manual NOTE If ANY of these apply to you then change your coolant every 102 000 miles 170 000 km or 60 months whichever comes first and follow schedule B of the Maintenance Schedules section of this manual M A C E 5 C H E D U L E 5 8 M A T E N A N C E S C H D U L 5 8 336 SCHEDULE Wira sary Miles 3 000 6 000 9 000 12 000 15 000 Kilometers 5 000 10 000 15 000 20000 25 000 Change engine oil and oil filter or at 3 months X X X X X whichever comes first Inspect engine air cleaner filter replace if neces X Rotate tires Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct stowage w SCHEDULE 337 Miles 18 000 21 000 24 000 27 000 30 000 Kilometers 30 000 35 000 40 000 45 000 50 000 Change engine oil and oil filter or at 3 months 4 ee first A Replace the air cleaner filter X Rotate tires X au tire for proper pressure and correct X Inspect brake linings X Replace Spark Plugs 2 4L Engine X M A A
184. f fluid is added it should be added through the dipstick hole in the case Procedure For Checking Fluid Level The fluid level in the automatic transaxle should be checked whenever the vehicle is serviced Operation with an improper fluid level will greatly reduce the life of the transaxle and of the fluid The fluid level in the automatic transaxle with 3 5L engine should be checked only by a trained technician To properly check the automatic transaxle fluid level the following procedure must be used 1 The vehicle must be on level ground 2 The engine should be running at curb idle speed for a minimum of 60 seconds 3 Fully apply parking brake 4 Place the gear selector momentarily in each gear position ending with the lever in P PARK Wipe the area around the dipstick clean to eliminate the possibility of dirt entering the transaxle 5 Remove the dipstick and determine if the fluid is hot or warm Hot fluid is approximately 180 F 82 C which is the normal operating temperature after the vehicle has been driven at least 15 miles 24 km The fluid cannot be comfortably held between the finger tips Cold is when the fluid is below 80 F 27 C 6 Wipe the dipstick clean and reinsert until seated Remove dipstick and note reading a If the fluid is hot the reading should be in the crosshatched area marked HOT between the upper two holes in the dipstick b If the fluid is cold the fluid level shou
185. f this manual UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 157 Key Off Power Display When this feature is selected the power window switches radio hands free system if equipped power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned off Opening a vehicle door will cancel this feature To make your selection press and hold the RESET button until Off 45 sec 5 min or 10 min appears Illumination Approach When this feature is selected the headlights will activate and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the remote keyless entry transmitter To make your selection press and hold the RESET button until OFF 30 sec 60 sec or 90 sec appears Confirmation of Voice Commands If Equipped When ON is selected all voice commands from the UConnect system are confirmed To make your selec tion press and hold the RESET button until ON or OFF appears Display Units of Measure in English or Metric The EVIC odometer and navigation system if equipped can be changed between English and Metric units of measure To make your selection press and release the RESET button until US or METRIC ap pears SETTING THE ANALOG CLOCK To set the analog clock at the top center of the instrument panel press and hold the but ton until the setting is correct The clock will adju
186. front driver and passenger seat contain inflatable side airbags to protect the occupant from impact injuries Correctly functioning front passenger seat components are critical for the Occupant Restraint Controller System ORC to properly classify the front passenger and calcu late the proper airbag deployment Do not make any modifications to the front passenger seat components assembly or to the seat cover THINGS KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 The following requirements must be strictly adhered to Do not make any modifications to the front passenger seat components assembly or to the seat cover in any Way Do not use prior or future model year seat covers not designated for the specific model being repaired Al ways use the correct seat cover specified for the vehicle Do not replace the seat cover with an aftermarket seat cover Do not add a secondary seat cover other than those approved by DaimlerChrysler Mopar WARNING Unapproved modifications or service procedures to the front passenger seat assembly its related compo nents or seat cover may inadvertently change the airbag deployment in case of a frontal crash This could result in death or serious injury to the front seat passenger if the vehicle is involved in an acci dent A modified vehicle may not comply with required Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards FMVSS Enhanced Accident Response System In the event of an impact
187. g light levels Headlight Time Delay There is also a feature that delays turning off the vehicle lights for 30 60 or 90 seconds after the ignition switch is turned OFF To activate the headlight delay the multi function control lever must be rotated to the position after the ignition switch is turned OFF Only the headlights will illuminate during this time Refer to EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Section 4 to turn this feature On Off or set the time interval Passing Light Flash to Pass You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the Multi Function Control Lever toward you This will cause the headlights to turn on at high beam and remain on until the lever is released NOTE If the Multi Function Control Lever is held in the flash to pass position for more than 15 seconds the high beams will shut off If this occurs wait 30 seconds for the next flash to pass operation w UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 Daytime Running Lights DRL If Equipped The high beam lights will come on as Daytime Running Lights DRL at DRL intensity lower whenever the ignition is on the engine is running the headlight switch is off the parking brake is off the turn signal is off and the gearshift lever is in any position except park NOTE On this vehicle the daytime running light will automatically turn off when the turn signal is in opera tion and automatically
188. ght e Driver Airbag e Front Passenger Airbag THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC If Equipped Airbags If 2 Front Seat side mounted Thorax Equipped Front Impact Sensors Side Impact Sensors If Equipped Steering Wheel and Column Instrument Panel Interconnecting Wiring Seat Belt Reminder Light Knee Impact Bolster Front Seat Belt Buckle Pretensioners 42 THINGS KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE nra Front Seat Airbag Features The front airbag system has dual stage driver and front passenger airbags This system provides output appro priate to the level of crash severity as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC and the impact sensors at the front of the car The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires airbag deployment The timing of the second stage determines whether the output force is low medium or high If a low output is sufficient to meet the need the second stage is expended later in the crash event Driver Airbag Special Features Driver airbag deployment and force level is controlled by the driver s seat position as well as impact severity Use of special inflators result in a very compact driver s side airbag In addition to the small size the inflating gasses exit through strategically placed vents which direct the gas away from the occupant Front Passenger Ai
189. h is first turned on e The light remains on after the 6 to 8 second interval e The light comes on and remains on while driving NOTE If the speedometer tachometer or any engine related gauges are not working the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC may also be disabled The airbags may not be ready to inflate for your protection Promptly check fuse block for blown fuses Refer to the label located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the proper airbag fuses See your dealer if the fuse is good Event Data Recorder EDR In the event of an accident your vehicle is designed to record up to 5 seconds of specific vehicle data parameters see the following list in an event data recorder prior to the moment of airbag deployment or near deployment and up to a quarter second of high speed deceleration data during and or after airbag deployment EDR data are ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys or nearly deploys and are otherwise unavailable THINGS KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 NOTE 1 A near deployment event occurs when the airbag sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually indica tive of a crash but not severe enough to warrant airbag deployment 2 Under certain circumstances EDR data may not be recorded e g loss of battery power In conjunction with other data gathered during a com plete accident investigation the electronic data may be used by DaimlerChrysler Corporation and others t
190. h the RESUME ACCEL lever up and release Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph 32 km h To Vary The Speed Setting When the speed control is ON speed can be increased by pushing up and holding RESUME ACCEL Release the lever when the desired speed is reached and the new speed will be set Tapping RESUME ACCEL once will result in a 1 mph 2 km h speed increase Each time the lever is tapped speed increases so that tapping the lever three times will increase speed by 3 mph 5 km h etc To decrease speed while speed control is ON push down and hold SET DECEL Release the lever when the desired speed is reached and the new speed will be set Tapping the SET DECEL button once will result in a 1 mph 2 km h speed decrease Each time the button is tapped speed decreases WARNING Speed Control can be dangerous where the system can t maintain a constant speed Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions and you could lose control An accident could be the result Don t use Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding icy snow covered or slippery UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES YOUR VEHICLE 115 To Accelerate For Passing Depress the accelerator as you would normally When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed Using Speed Control On Hills NOTE The speed control system maintains speed up and down hills A slight
191. harged battery Make sure you have a good contact on the engine ground Refer to the following illustration for jump starting connections Jump Starting Location 282 WHAT DO EMERGENCIES w 6 If the vehicle is equipped with Sentry Key Immobi lizer turn the ignition switch to the ON position for 3 seconds before moving the ignition switch to the START position 7 Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery let the engine idle a few minutes then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery 8 When removing the jumper cables reverse the se quence exactly Be careful of the moving belts and fan 9 Reinstall the protective cover over the remote jump start positive battery post WARNING e During cold weather when temperatures are be low freezing point electrolyte in a discharged battery may freeze Do not attempt jump starting because the battery could rupture or explode The battery temperature must be brought up above freezing point before attempting jump start NOTE To access the battery for service or replacement refer to Maintenance Procedures in the MAINTAIN ING YOUR VEHICLE section of this manual FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE NOTE If your vehicle is equipped with Traction Con trol turn the system OFF before attempting to rock the vehicle If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud sand or snow it can often be moved by a rocking motion Turn your steering
192. hat the parking brake is on It does not show the degree of brake application NOTE If the light remains on with the parking brake released a brake system malfunction is indicated Have the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer im mediately NOTE If the parking brake is applied while the vehicle is moving a chime will sound to alert the driver The chime will sound up to 10 times or until the vehicle has returned to a stop Before leaving the vehicle make sure that the parking brake is fully applied For manual transaxle vehicles place the gear selector in REVERSE For vehicles equipped with automatic transaxles place the gear selec tor in the PARK position To release the parking brake slightly pull up the handle while pushing the lock button and guide the lever downward to its stop The brake warning light in the instrument cluster should go out NOTE The parking brake lever will not release unless Parking Brake Lever STARTING AND OPERATING 217 NOTE When parking a hill it is important to set the parking brake before placing the gear selector in Park otherwise the load on the automatic transaxle locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the selector out of Park As an added precaution turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on a uphill grade NOTE You should always apply the parking brake before leaving the vehicle WARNING e Neve
193. he recom mended SAE viscosity grade Follow the maintenance schedule that describes your driving type Materials Added To Engine Oils The manufacture strongly recommends against the addi tion of any additives other than leak detection dyes to the engine oil Engine oil is an engineered product and it s performance may be impaired by supplemental ad ditives Disposing of Used Engine Oil Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil from your vehicle Used oil indiscriminately discarded can present a problem to the environment Contact your dealer service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil can be safely discarded in your area Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine oil change Engine Oil Filter Selection All of this manufacturers engines have a full flow type disposable oil filter Use a filter of this type for replace ment The quality of replacement filters varies consider ably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service Mopar Engine Oil Filters are high quality oil filters and are recommended Spark Plugs Spark plugs must fire properly to assure engine perfor mance and emission control New plugs should be in stalled at the specified mileage The entire set should be replaced if there is any malfunction due to a faulty spark plug Refer to the Engine data Label located under the hood for the proper type of sp
194. he stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the push button twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will be displayed Buttons 1 6 Radio Mode These buttons tune the Radio to the stations that you commit to push button memory 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations 166 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL wan DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to Disc modes Operation Instructions DISC MODE for CD and MP3 WMA Audio Play DVD VIDEO The radio DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by geographic region These region codes must match in order for the disc to play If the region code for the DVD disc does not match the region code for the radio DVD player it will not play the disc Customers may take their vehicle to a authorized dealer to change the region code of the player a maximum total of 5 times CAUTION The radio may shut down during extremely hot conditions When this occurs the radio will indicate Disc Hot and shut off until a safe temperature is reached This shutdown is necessary to protect the optics of the DVD player and other radio internal components NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio LOAD Button Loading Compact Disc s Press the LOAD button and the push button with the corresponding number 1 6 where the CD is being loaded The radio
195. he user s safety or the safety of others ESP Operating Modes All ESP equipped vehicles can choose the following ESP operating modes ESP ON This is the normal operating mode for ESP Whenever the vehicle is started the ESP system will be in this mode This mode should be used for almost all driving situations ESP should only be turned to Partial Off for specific reasons as noted below PARTIAL ESP Mode This mode is entered by momentarily depressing the ESP Control Switch When in Partial Off mode the TCS portion of ESP except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section has been disabled and the ESP TCS Indicator Light will be illumi nated All other stability features of ESP function normally with the exception of engine power reduc tion This mode is intended to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow sand or gravel conditions and more wheel spin than ESP would normally allow is required to gain traction To turn ESP on again momentarily depress the ESP Control Switch This will restore the normal ESP On mode of operation 224 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING In the Partial ESP mode the engine torque reduction and stability features are desensitized Therefore the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESP is unavailable NOTE To improve the vehicle s traction when driving with snow chains or starting off in deep snow sand or gravel it may b
196. her than full cold or full hot between the upper and lower outlets for added comfort The warmer air goes to the floor outlets This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions Floor Mode x J Air is directed through the floor outlets with a small amount through the defrost and side window demist outlets Mix Mode Ve Air is directed through the floor defrost and side 2 window demist outlets This setting works best cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat at UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199 the windshield This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield Defrost Mode 5 Air is directed through the windshield and side window demist outlets Use this mode with maxi mum blower and temperature settings for best wind shield and side window defrosting Operating Tips NOTE Refer to the chart at the end of this section for suggested control settings for various weather condi tions Summer Operation The engine cooling system in air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating A 50 solution of ethylene glycol antifreeze coolant in water is recommended Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Section 7 of this manual for proper coolant selection Winter Operation Use of the air Recirculation mode during winter months is
197. hicle Information Center EVIC in the instru ment cluster all warnings including DOOR AJAR and TRUNK AJAR will only be displayed in the EVIC display For additional information refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center If Equipped in Section 3 The two if equipped trip odometers show individual trip mileage To switch from odometer to trip odometers press and release the Trip Odometer button To reset a UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 143 trip odometer display the desired trip odometer to be reset then push and hold the button until the display resets approximately 2 seconds U S federal regulations require that upon transfer of vehicle ownership the seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven There fore if the odometer reading is changed during repair or replacement be sure to keep a record of the reading before and after the service so that the correct mileage can be determined 16 Malfunction Indicator Light This light is part of an onboard diagnostic Y system called OBD that monitors emissions engine and automatic transaxle control sys tems The light will illuminate when the key is in the ON RUN position before engine start If the bulb does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON RUN have the condition checked promptly Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap poor fuel quality etc may illuminate the lig
198. hicles with the E 85 fuel filler door label can operate on E 85 For more information see Flexible Fuel in this section Problems that result from using methanol gasoline blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer While MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol it does not have the negative effects of Methanol 252 STARTING AND OPERATING MMT In Gasoline MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase the octane num ber Gasolines blended with MMT offer no performance advantage beyond gasolines of the same octane number without MMT Gasolines blended with MMT have shown to reduce spark plug life and reduce emission system performance in some vehicles The manufacturer recom mends using gasolines without MMT Since the MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the pump you should ask your gasoline retailer whether or not his her gasoline contains MMT It is even more important to look for gasolines without MMT in Canada because MMT can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the United States MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformu lated gasolines Materials Added to Fuel All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain effective detergent additives Use of additional detergents or other additives is not needed under normal conditions and would result in additional cost Therefore you should not have to add anything t
199. ht after engine start The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several of your typical driving cycles In most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing If the Malfunction Indicator Light flashes when the engine is running serious conditions may exist that could lead to immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage The vehicle should be serviced as soon as possible if this occurs If this indicator comes on the entire PRNDL odometer display will brighten to FULL DAYTIME INTENSITY and will not be dimmable 17 Cruise Indicator If Equipped his indicator shows that the Speed Control System is ON 18 OdometerlTrip Odometer Reset Knob Press this button to change the display from odometer to either of the two trip odometer settings Trip A or Trip B if equipped will appear when in the trip odometer mode Push in and hold the button for two seconds to reset the trip odometer to 0 miles or kilometers The odometer must be in trip mode to reset 144 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 19 Electronic Throttle Control Indicator Light This red illuminated light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control system If a problem is detected the light will come on while the engine is running If the light remains lit with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing however see your dealer for service as soon
200. ht can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON position The light should illuminate for approxi mately two seconds The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected If the light does not illuminate have the light inspected by an authorized dealer The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON position NOTE This light shows only that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application 27 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display Premium Cluster Only This window will display EVIC information ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER EVIC IF EQUIPPED 14 F 101 1 10 819788 7 Display Location The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea tures a driver interactive display It is located in the lower left part of the cluster below the fuel and engine tem perature gauge The EVIC consists of the following e System Status e Vehicle information warning message displays e Personal Settings customer programmable features UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 147 e Compass heading 5 E W NE NW SE SW e Outside temperature display F or C e Trip computer functions e UConnect hands free communication system dis plays if equipped e Audio mode display 12 preset Radio Stations or CD 4 lt Title and Tra
201. i cally held against the ignition key being used when starting the vehicle Cell phones pagers or other RF electronics will not cause interference with this system All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics Replacement Keys NOTE Only keys that have been programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle Once a Sentry Key has been programmed to a vehicle it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle At the time of purchase the original owner is provided with a four digit PIN number This number is required for dealer replacement of keys Duplication of keys may be performed at an authorized dealer or by using the Customer Key Programming procedure This procedure consists of programming a blank key to the vehicle electronics A blank key is one which has never been programmed NOTE When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced bring all vehicle keys with you to the dealer Sentry Key Programming You can program new keys to the system if you have two valid sentry keys by performing the following procedure 1 Cut the additional Sentry Key Transponder blank s to match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code 2 Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch and turn the ignition switch ON for at least 3 seconds but no longer than 15 seconds Turn the ignition switch OFF and remove the first key 3 Insert the second valid key a
202. icle is damaged due to an accident or similar cause which destroys the paint and protective coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as pos sible The cost of such repairs is considered the respon sibility of the owner If you carry special cargo such as chemicals fertilizers de icer salt etc be sure that such materials are well packaged and sealed If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 315 Use Mopar touch up paint on scratches as soon as possible Your dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle Wheel and Wheel Trim Care All wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion To remove heavy soil use Mopar Wheel Cleaner or select a nonabra sive non acidic cleaner Do not use scouring pads steel wool a bristle brush or metal polishes Only Mopar cleaners are recommended Do not use oven cleaner Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels protective finish Interior Care Cleaning Interior Trim Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp cloth a damp cloth with Mopar Total Clean then Mopar Spot amp Stain Remover if absolutely necessary Do not use harsh cleaners or Armorall Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery Cleaning Leather Uphol
203. icle through the trunk and opens any door the alarm will sound e When the system is armed the interior power door lock switches will not unlock the doors The Vehicle Security Alarm system is designed to protect your vehicle however you can create conditions where the system will give you a false alarm If one of the previously described arming sequences has occurred the system will arm regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not If you remain in the vehicle and open a door the alarm will sound If this occurs disarm the system If the alarm system is armed and the battery becomes disconnected the system will remain armed when the battery is reconnected The exterior lights will flash the horn will sound and the ignition will not start the vehicle If this occurs disarm the system 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE w cCmCCcCvss r lt s qn Tamper Alert If the alarm was triggered but the warning signals have timed out the park and taillights flash three times instead of the normal twice when unlocking the vehicle with a valid Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter to alert the driver Security System Manual Override The Vehicle Theft Security Alarm VTSA system will not arm if you lock the doors using the manual door lock plunger Manual Lock Plunger ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the keyless entry transmitter or open the door
204. ignition to the ON position but do not crank or start the engine 3 If you crank or start the engine you will have to start this test over 4 As soon as you turn your key to the ON position you will see your MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check 5 Approximately 15 seconds later one of two things will happen a The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn off the ignition key or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I M station 292 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE b The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn off the ignition key or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD system is ready and you can proceed to the I M station If your OBD system is not ready you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD system to update A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready Regardless of whether your vehicle s OBD system is ready or not ready if the MIL symbol is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I M station The I M station can fail your vehicle b
205. im cover or dealer as soon as possible Also have the Occupant the upper right side of the instrument panel Do Restraint Controller System serviced as well not modify the front bumper vehicle body struc ture or add aftermarket side steps or running boards It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the airbag system yourself Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system 52 THINGS KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE www c wct WARNING Do not attempt to modify any part of your advanced airbag system The airbag may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if modifications are made Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any advanced airbag system service If your seat including your trim cover and cushion needs to be serviced in any way including removal or loosening tightening of seat attachment bolts take the vehicle to your authorized dealer Only manufac turer approved seat accessories may be used If it is necessary to modify an advanced airbag system for persons with disabilities contact your authorized dealer Airbag Light You will want to have the airbags ready to inflate for your protection in a collision While the airbag system is designed to be mainte nance free if any of the following occurs have an authorized dealer service the system immediately t The AIRBAG light does not come on during the 6 to 8 seconds when the ignition switc
206. in loss of vehicle control Tire Spinning When stuck in mud sand snow or ice conditions do not spin your vehicle s wheels above 30 mph 48 km h for more than 30 seconds continuously Refer to Freeing A Stuck Vehicle in Section 6 of this manual for additional information Tread Wear Indicators Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be replaced These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes 1 16 inch 2 mm When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the tire should be replaced Many states have laws requiring tire replacement at this point STARTING AND OPERATING 241 Life of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to e Driving style e Tire pressure e Distance driven WARNING Tires and spare tire should be replaced after six years regardless of the remaining tread Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure You could lose control and have an accident result ing in serious injury or death Keep dismounted tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gasoline Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be i
207. in radios Add Names to Your UConnect Phonebook NOTE Adding names to phone book is recommended when vehicle is not in motion Press the Phone button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook New Entry When prompted say the name of the new entry Use of long names helps the voice recognition and it is recommended For example say Robert Smith or Robert instead of Bob When prompted enter the number designation e g Home Work Mobile or Pager This will allow you to store multiple numbers for each phone book entry if desired When prompted recite the phone number for the phone book entry that you are adding After you are finished adding an entry into the phone book you will be given the opportunity to add more phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the main menu ww UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 79 The UConnect system will allow you to enter up to 32 names in the phone book with each name having up to four associated phone numbers and designations Each language has a separate 32 name phone book accessible only in that language Edit Entries in the UConnect Phonebook NOTE Editing names in the phone book is recom mended when vehicle is not in motion Press the Phone button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Edit You will then be asked for the name of the phone
208. ination lap shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the automatic lock ing mode and activate the vehicle sensitive emergency locking mode Rear Seat Belts Three point belts are nonadjustable for outboard and center rear passengers on sedans The center belt is mounted to the rear shelf panel and exits through a bezel in the panel Seat Belt Pretensioners The seat belts for both front seating positions are equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision These devices improve the performance of the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early in a collision Pretensioners work for all size occupants including those in child restraints In addition the front passenger seat belt includes a two stage load limiting feature to enhance occupant pro tection for the same reason NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re straint Controller ORC see Airbag Section Like the front airbags the pretensioners are single use items After a collision that is severe enough to deploy the airbags and pretensioners both must be replaced BeltAlert Enhanced Warning System If the occupied driver s seat belt has not been buckled within 60 seconds of starting the vehi
209. iners of the vehicle hitch Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on grade When parking apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in P for Park Always block or chock the trailer wheels GCWR must not be exceeded Total weight must be distributed between the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the following four ratings are not exceeded 1 GVWR 2 GTW 3 GAWR 4 Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized This requirement may limit the ability to always achieve 10 of tongue weight as a percentage of total trailer weight Towing Requirements Tires Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact spare tire Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Refer to the Tires General Information section of this manual on Tire Pressures for proper tire inflation procedures Also check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before trailer usage Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer Refer to the Tires General Information section of this manual on Tread Wear Indicators for the proper inspection procedure When replacing tires refer to the Tires General Infor mation section of this manual on Replacement Tires for proper tire replacement procedures Re
210. ing of a tire failure or condition The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte nance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale lamp 248 STARTING AND OPERATING General Information This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op eration The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the following licenses United States sez o RR n 55120123 Canada 2671 5120123 TIRE CHAINS Due to limited clearance tire chains are not recom mended CAUTION Damage to the vehicle may result if tire chains are used SNOW TIRES Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during winter Standard tires are of the all season type and satisfy this requirement as indicated by the
211. ion on snow covered wet or other slip pery surfaces may cause the front wheels to pull errati cally to the right or left This phenomenon occurs when there is a difference in the surface traction under the front driving wheels WARNING Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is danger ous Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the front wheels You could lose control of the vehicle and possibly have an accident Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction ice snow wet mud loose sand etc Traction When driving on wet or slushy roads it is possible for a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road surface This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability To reduce this possibility the following precautions should be observed 1 Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are slushy 2 Slow down if road has standing water or puddles 3 Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become visible 4 Keep tires properly inflated 5 Maintain enough distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden stop TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION Tire Markings SERVICE MAXIMUM DESCRIPTION LOAD MAXIMUM SIZE DESIGNATION PRESSURE TREADWEAR U S TRACTION SAFETY AND STANDARDS TEMPERATURE CODE GRADES 811b44e8 NOTE P Passenger Metric
212. ios System Activation Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre activated and you may begin listening immediately to the one year of SIRIUS audio service that is included with the factory installed satellite radio system in your vehicle Sirius will contact you to supply a welcome kit and to confirm subscription information including the set up of your on line listening account at no additional charge For further information call the toll free number 888 539 7474 or visit the Sirius web site at www sirius com Please have the following information available when calling 1 The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID 2 Your Vehicle Identification Number Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ENS SID The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Num ber is needed to activate your Sirius Satellite Radio system To access the ESN SID refer to the following steps 184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME ESN SID Access With RSC Radios With the ignition switch in the ON RUN or ACCESSORY position and the radio ON press the SETUP button and scroll using the TUNE control knob until Sirius ID is selected Press the TUNE control knob and the Sirius ID number will be displayed The Sirius ID number display will time out in 2 minutes Press any button on the radio to exit this screen Selecting Satellite Mode RSC Radios Press the SAT button until SAT appears in the display
213. irrors Inside Day Night Mirror If Equipped Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped Electric Remote Control Mirrors Adjusting Side View Mirrors Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped Hands Free Communication UConnect If Equipped Operations Phone Call Features UConnect System Features Advanced Phone Connectivity Things You Should Know About Your UConnect System 88 General Information 95 ho NETT 96 Manual Front Seat Adjustments 96 Power Seats If Equipped 98 Heated Seats If Equipped 99 Fold Flat Front Passenger Seat 100 Adjustable Head Restraints 101 Folding Rear Seat 101 Folding Rear Seat Center Armrest 102 ll To Open And Close The Hood 103 68 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES YOUR VEHICLE ww MB RR RIPE 104 Mist Feature 110 Map Reading Interior Lights 104 Windshield Wiper Operation 11 Multi Function Control 105 Speed Sensitive Intermittent Wiper System 111 Hea
214. it insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly The lap portion could ride too high on your body possibly causing internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well In a sudden stop you could move too far forward increasing the possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snugly Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle THINGS KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 4 Position the lap belt across your thighs below your abdomen To remove slack in the lap belt portion pull up e A belt that is worn under your arm is very on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight dangerous Your body could strike the inside sur tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt A snug belt faces of the vehicle in a collision increasing head reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision and neck injury A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries Ribs aren t as strong as shoulder bones Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision e A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear
215. it 10 to To enter the Remote Start mode depress the Remote 15 seconds before trying again Start button twice on the key fob The engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the remote start mode for a 15 minute cycle Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the 210 STARTING AND OPERATING ww swmwwvsI FEF amp 193fa7a REMOTE START BUTTON To exit the Remote Start mode allow the x2 engine to run the cycle or depress the unlock button to disarm the Vehicle Theft Security Alarm and within one minute insert the key into the ignition and turn the ignition to the RUN position The ignition must be in the RUN position in order to drive the vehicle NOTE The engine be started two consecutive times two 15 minute cycles by using the key fob For a third cycle the key must be cycled to the ignition RUN position and then repeat the start sequence To shut off the vehicle when it is in Remote Start mode press the remote start button once In order to avoid inadvertent shut downs the one time press to shut down the vehicle will be disabled for two seconds after receipt of a valid remote start request NOTE When the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode power window and sunroof operation are disabled for security The following conditions must be met before the engine will remote start e Automatic Transaxle in Park doors are closed e Hood is closed e Hazard Switch is off
216. it will become the new active call If the active call is terminated by the far end a call on hold may not become active automatically This is cell phone dependent To bring the call back from hold press and hold the Phone button until you hear a single beep Redial e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Redial e The UConnect system will call the last number that was dialed on your cellular phone NOTE This may not be the last number dialed from the UConnect system Call Continuation Call continuation is progression of a phone call on UConnect system after the vehicle ignition key has been switched to off Call continuation functionality available on the vehicle can be any one of three types After ignition key is switched off a call can continue on the UConnect system either until the call ends or wf UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 83 until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of the call on the UConnect system and transfer of the call to the mobile phone After ignition key is switched to off a call can continue on the UConnect system for certain duration after which the call is automatically transferred from the UConnect system to the mobile phone e An active call is automatically transferred to the mobile phone after ignition key is switched to off UConnect System Features Language Selection T
217. ke functions BRAKE including brake fluid level and parking brake application If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied that the brake fluid level is low or that there is a problem with the anti lock brake system if equipped The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system Failure of either half of the dual brake system is 146 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL r indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level The light will remain on until the cause is corrected NOTE The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi tions The vehicle should have service performed and the brake fluid level checked If brake failure is indicated immediate repair is neces sary WARNING Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is danger ous Part of the brake system may have failed It will take longer to stop the vehicle You could have an accident Have the vehicle checked immediately Vehicles equipped with Anti Lock brakes ABS are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD In the event of an EBD failure the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light Immediate repair to the ABS system is required The operation of the Brake Warning Lig
218. l flash on and 142 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL a off for 60 seconds when a system fault is detected The flash cycle will repeat every ten minutes or until the fault condition is removed and reset If this indicator comes on the entire PRNDL odometer display will brighten to FULL DAYTIME INTENSITY and will not be dimmable CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system op eration or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use tire sealant from a can or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result 15 OdometerlTrip Odometer Avacuum fluorescent display indicates the total distance the vehicle has been driven Also the cluster odometer will display the following vehicle warning messages door trunk ajar and loose gas cap Loose Fuel Filler Cap If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged FUEL CAP OFF will be displayed in the instrument cluster odometer Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the odometer reset button to turn the FUEL CAP OFF message off NOTE If vehicle is equipped with the optional Elec tronic Ve
219. l turn off the LOW FUEL text and a new DTE value will display e Elapsed Time Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset when the ignition switch is in the ACC position Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON or START position e Display Units of Measure in To make your selection press and release the RESET button until US or METRIC appears To Reset The Display O Pressing and holding the RESET button once will clear the function currently being dis played Reset will only occur if resettable RESET function is currently being displayed To reset Button all resettable functions press and release the RESET button a second time within 3 seconds of resetting the currently displayed function Reset ALL will be displayed during this 3 second window Compass Display COMPASS Button The compass readings indicate the direction the vehicle is facing Press and release the reser compass button to display one of eight com pass readings and the outside temperature The RESET button is used in conjunction with the MENU STEP buttons to navigate and select Menu Preferences Automatic Compass Calibration This compass is self calibrating eliminating the need to calibrate the compass manually When the vehicle is new the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display FLASH THE CAL indicator until the compass UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PA
220. lay Turn the TUNE control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the Bass tones Press the rotary TUNE control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the Mid Range tones Press the rotary TUNE control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the Treble tones Press the rotary TUNE control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Press the rotary TUNE control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Press the rotary TUNE control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade 162 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL na IG i MUSIC TYPE Button Radio Mode i News News Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type Nostalgia Nostalga mode for 5 seconds Pressing the Music Type button or Oldi Oldi turning the TUNE control knob within 5 seconds will E allow the program format type to be selected Many radio Personality a stations do not currently broadcast Music Type informa Public Public tion Rhythm and Blues R amp B Toggle the Music Type button to select th
221. ld be between the lower two holes in the area marked COLD MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 313 If the fluid level indicates low add sufficient fluid to bring to the proper level CAUTION Do not overfill Dirt and water in the transaxle can cause serious damage To prevent dirt and water from entering the transaxle after checking or replen ishing fluid make certain that the dipstick cap is re seated properly Special Additives Do not add any materials other than leak detection dyes to Automatic transaxle Fluid ATF ATF is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supple mental additives Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion Protection Of Body And Paint from Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo graphic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle Outside parking which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint metal trim and under body protection The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle What Causes Corrosion Corrosion is the result of deterioration or rem
222. ll soon dissipate Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle e Check coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle If antifreeze needs to be added contents of coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against freezing If frequent coolant additions are required or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when the engine cools the cooling system should be pres sure tested for leaks MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 309 e Maintain coolant concentration at 50 HOAT engine coolant minimum and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components e Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed e Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning keep the front of the condenser clean also e Do not change the thermostat for summer or winter operation If replacement is ever necessary install ONLY the correct type thermostat Other designs may result in unsatisfactory coolant performance poor gas mileage and increased emissions Hoses And Vacuum Vapor Harnesses Inspect surfaces of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence of heat and mechanical damage Hard or soft spots brittle rubber cracking tears cuts abrasions and exces sive swelling indicate deterioration of the rubber Pay particular attention to the hoses nearest to high he
223. ly are Relying too much on your right side mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in this convex mirror w UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 73 Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped An illuminated vanity mirror is on each sun visor To use the mirror rotate the sun visor down and swing the mirror cover upward The lights will turn on automati cally Closing the mirror cover turns off the lights Illuminated Vanity Mirror HANDS FREE COMMUNICATION UConnect IF EQUIPPED UConnect is a voice activated hands free in vehicle communications system UConnect allows you to dial a phone number with your cellular phone using simple voice commands e g Call Mike Work or Dial 248 555 1212 Your cellular phone s audio is trans mitted through your vehicle s audio system the system will automatically mute your radio when using the UConnect system NOTE The UConnect system use requires a cellular phone equipped with the Bluetooth Hands Free Profile version 0 96 or higher See www chrysler com uconnect for supported phones UConnect allows you to transfer calls between the system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system s micro phone for private conversation 74 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHIC
224. m water STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS Starting Procedures 207 Automatic Transaxle 207 Normal Starting xke eR ERN XR PA 207 Tip Start Feature Automatic Transaxle Only 208 Extremely Cold Weather Below 20 F Or 29 C 34 055 wa ad tea 208 If Engine Fails To Start 208 After Starting ms sare mia arse RU T 209 Remote Start System If Equipped 209 How To Use Remote Start 209 Bl Automatic 211 Brake Transaxle Interlock System Automatic Transaxle Ignition Interlock System Four Speed Or Six Speed AutoStick Automatic Transaxle Bl AutoStick If Equipped AutoStick Operation AutoStick General Information B Parking esee s XR WA W Brake System Anti Lock Brake System ABS JC Equipped 22 0 82s4G eee be ore ae Fue es 204 STARTING AND OPERATING Electronic Brake Control System Tires General Information 235 BROMO BARRON
225. mately within 30 feet the vehicle 88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE www Delete UConnect Paired Cellular Phones e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing e At the next prompt say Delete and follow the prompts e You can also press the Voice Recognition button anytime while the list is being played and then choose the phone you wish to delete Things You Should Know About Your UConnect System Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog nizing their voice commands or numbers the UCon nect system Voice Training feature may be used To enter this training mode follow one of the two proce dures From outside the UConnect mode e g from radio mode e Press and hold the Voice Recognition button for 5 seconds until the session begins or e Press the Voice Recognition button and say Setup Voice Training command Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the UConnect system For best results the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched off This procedure may be repeated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only To restore the Voice Recognition system to factory default settings enter the Voice Training session via the above pro
226. may result from improper towing 284 WHAT DO EMERGENCIES If it is necessary to use the accessories while being towed wipers defrosters etc the key must be in the ON position not the ACCESSORY position Make certain the transaxle remains in NEUTRAL Without The Ignition Key Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed with the ignition in the LOCK position A dolly should be used under the front wheels if the rear wheels are raised Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent dam age to the vehicle Battery power is required to release the brake transmission interlock system There is an override sys tem that allows you to shift out of Park in case of loss of power To activate the override system remove the cup holder liner insert a key screwdriver or finger into the front hole and push the lever forward Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On The Ground CAUTION DO NOT flat tow this vehicle Damage to the driv etrain will result MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS E 2 4L Engine Compartment 287 2 7L Engine Compartment 288 3 5L Engine Compartment 289 ll Onboard Diagnostic System OBD 290 Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 290 Emissions Inspection And Maintenance Programs 291 Bl Replacement Parts
227. me too hot If this happens the HOTOIL message flashes the vehicle speed will be reduced to 53 mph 85 km h until the engine oil temperature is reduced NOTE Engine speed is reduced to 53 mph 85 km h at the maximum You may of course reduce your speed further if needed CAUTION Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle If temperature gauge reads H pull over and stop the vehicle with the engine at idle when safe Turn the air conditioner off and wait until the pointer drops back into the normal range After appropriate action has been taken if the pointer remains on the H turn the engine off immediately and call for service WARNING A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant You may want to call a service center if your vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the hood yourself refer to Section 7 Maintenance of this manual Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph 274 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES w JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING WARNING e Being under a jacked up vehicle is dangerous The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you You could be crushed Never put any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift
228. memory By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency station with the same selected Music Type name The Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode 176 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se You may add a second station to each push button by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into push button memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the push button twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will be displayed Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to push button memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to Disc modes Operation Instructions CD MODE for CD and MP3 Audio Play NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio NOTE This Radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable com pact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will au
229. mote Control Door LOCKS usse ds 4 na Ry rU 17 Security Alarm 2 22 2 14 Remote Keyless Entry Sedan 17 Remote Sound System Radio Controls 188 Remote Trunk Release 29 Replacement Bulbs 321 Replacement Keys 13 Replacement Parts 292 Replacement Tires oriog srci samea isien aks 241 Reporting Safety Defects 353 Restramnt He d 4 929 E px Sanu Q 101 Restraints Child 54 Restraints Infant 55 Rotation TES L sss haw REX ERES 249 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle 64 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 65 Safety Defects Reporting 353 Safety Information Tire 227 Safety lips issus RR or Rx Rees 64 Satellite Radio Satellite Radio Antenna Schedule Maintenance 332 Seat Belt Maintenance Seat Belt Reminder Seat Belts Adjustable Shoulder Belt Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage 37 And Pregnant Women 368 INDEX wr Child Restraint 54 61 Extend f 24 0044 sua as 403540 c es wad kas 40 Front Seat 2555805 RA 32 Pretensioners bak See Ade Sua 38 Rear Seat ecu duce a tn en ae 32 Reminder 140 Seat Belts Sedan 31 Seals wees Sus
230. n Class Max GTW Gross Trailer Wt Class I Light Duty 2 000 Ibs 907 kg Class II Medium Duty 3 500 Ibs 1587 kg trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain Engine Transmission Max Frontal Area Max GTW Gross Trailer Wt Max Tongue Wt 2 4L Auto 15 Sq Ft 1 4 Sq My 1000 Ibs 450 kg 100 Ibs 45 kg 2 7L Auto 15 Sq Ft 1 4 Sq 1500 Ibs 680 kg 150 Ibs 68 kg 3 5L Auto 22 Sq Ft 3 7 Sq 2000 Ibs 907 kg 200 Ibs 91 kg Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo and should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard Refer to the Tire Safety Information Section in this manual 2 Enclosed trailers or open utility trailers with front shields guards are not recommended for use with 2 4L or 2 7L engine with automatic transmission Please see the website http wwwr 5 chrysler com searchapp ui jsp or your dealer for additional information 264 STARTING AND OPERATING CAUTION Towing a trailer with a larger than recommended frontal area could cause the engine to overheat or cause severe engine damage under extreme condi tions Trail
231. n either one of the center console cup holders ww UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 CAUTION If your vehicle is equipped with the heated and Optional Cup Holder Ash Receiver cooled cup holder locate the cup holder ash receiver in the forward cup holder E The optional ash receiver also comes with a cigar lighter You may use the power outlet located in the instrument panel below the climate control knob or in the bottom of the console compartment for this cigar lighter 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ww CONSOLE FEATURES Dual Storage Bins Lifting a latch at the front of the hinged armrest provides Console Features access to these storage areas The center console armrest slides forward from design position to provide added user comfort Two cup holders each of which can accommodate large sized fast food beverage containers A one piece cup holder insert for both cavities can easily be removed for cleaning The cup holders will also accommodate large size cups and 20 oz bottles An optional removable ashtray may be located in the one cup holder 81974145 1 Release button for top compartment 2 Release button for bottom compartment 3 Top Compartment 4 Bottom Compartment e The Left Latch opens to the top storage area Console Features UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 e The lower bin be accessed directly without
232. n on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow to scroll through tracks faster in CD MP3 modes SCAN Button Press the Scan button to scan through each track on the CD currently playing TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF Press the RW button to stop the CD at the beginning of the current CD track title 178 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM or FM Button Switches the Radio to the Radio mode RND Button Random Play Button Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly selected track Press the RND button a second time to stop Random Play Notes On Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tio
233. n with Lock When ON is selected a short horn sound will occur when the remote keyless entry Lock button is pressed This feature may be selected with or without the flash lights on lock unlock feature To make your selection press and release the RESET button until ON or OFF appears Flash Lights Lock When ON is selected the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the remote keyless entry transmitter This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected To make your selection press and release the RESET button until ON or OFF appears Headlights Off Delay When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle To make your selection press and hold the RESET button until 0 30 60 or 90 appears Headlights With Wipers Available with Auto Headlights Only When ON is selected and the headlight switch is in the AUTO position the headlights will turn on approxi mately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature To make your selection press and hold the RESET button until ON or OFF appears NOTE Turning the headlights on during the daytime causes the instrument panel lights to dim To increase the brightness refer to Lights in Section 3 o
234. nce the hand held trans mitter of the device may also be used at any time Erasing HomeLink Buttons To erase programming from the three buttons individual buttons cannot be erased but can be reprogrammed note below follow the step noted Press and hold the two outer HomeLink buttons for approximately 20 seconds Release the buttons when the indicator begins to flash rapidly All three channels will be cleared w UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 Reprogramming a Single HomeLink Button To program a device with a previously trained HomeLink button follow these steps 1 Press and hold the Universal Transceiver button to be reprogrammed Do not release until step 4 has been completed 2 When the indicator light begins to flash slowly after 20 seconds position the hand held transmitter one to three inches away from the button to be trained 3 Press and hold the hand held transmitter button 4 The Universal Transceiver indicator light will begin to flash first slowly then rapidly When the indicator lights begin to flash rapidly release both buttons Security If you sell your vehicle be sure to erase the frequencies by following the Erasing HomeLink Buttons instruc tions in this section This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with 55 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This devic
235. nce on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law 356 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE E WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed under inflation or excessive load ing either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure INDEX 358 INDEX ABS Anti Lock Brake System 218 Adding Engine Coolant Antifreeze 306 Adding Fuel 455558255459 eem 256 Adding Washer Fluid 111 Additives Fuel 252 Air Cleaner Engine Engine Air Cleaner Filter 299 Air Conditioner Maintenance 301 Air Conditioning xe xo Rhe xe 190 Air Conditioning Filter 200 Air Conditioning Operating Tips 201 Air Conditioning Refrigerant 301 302 Air Conditioning System 301 Air Pressure Tires 236 Aipa on gener henge 40 48 Airbag Deployment 50 Airbag Light 41 47 52 64 140 Airbag Maintenance 51 Airbag Sid 2 222 2 2 22 42 47 48 Airbag Window Side Curtain 43 47 8 Alarm System Security Alarm 14 140 Alignment and Balance 242 Alterations Modifications Vehicle 6 An
236. nd direction of air circulating throughout the vehicle The controls are located on the instrument panel below the radio The air conditioning system of your vehicle contains R 134a a refrigerant that does not deplete the ozone layer in the upper atmosphere Manual Air Conditioning and Heating System The controls for the heating air conditioning and venti lation system in this vehicle consist of a series of outer rotary dials inner push knobs These comfort controls can be set to obtain desired interior conditions amp 1 10401 Manual Air Conditioning and Heating Controls w UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191 The instrument panel features four airflow registers Two registers are located on the outer ends of the instrument panel and two are located in the center of the instrument panel These registers can be fully closed to partially block airflow and they can be adjusted to direct airflow where the occupant desires Blower Control There are four blower speeds Use this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the system in any mode you select The blower speed increases as you move the control to the right from the OFF position B189cd22 Temperature Control Use this control to regulate the temperature of the air in side the passenger compart ment The blue area of the scale indicates cooler tem peratures while the red area indicates warmer tempera tures 8199 4420 NOTE If
237. nd of the indicator range Change Engine Oil Road conditions and your kind of driving affects the interval at which your oil should be changed Check the following list to decide if any apply to you e Day and night temperatures are below 32 F 0 C e Stop and Go driving e Extensive engine idling e Driving in dusty conditions e Short trips of less than 10 miles 16 km e More than 50 of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 295 e Trailer towing e Taxi Police or delivery service commercial service e Off Road or desert operation e If equipped for and operating with E 85 ethanol fuel NOTE If ANY of these apply to you then change your engine oil every 3 000 miles 5 000 km or 3 months whichever comes first and follow schedule B AIl Engines of the Maintenance Schedules section of this manual If none of these apply to you then change your engine oil at every interval shown on schedule A in the maintenance schedule section of this manual NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6 000 miles 10 000 km or 6 months whichever occurs first Engine Oil Selection Gasoline Engines For best performance and maximum protection for all engines under all types of operating conditions the manufacturer recommends engine oils that are API Cer tified and meet the requirements of DaimlerChrysler M
238. nd turn the ignition switch ON within 15 seconds After ten seconds a chime will sound and the Theft Alarm Light will begin to flash Turn the ignition switch OFF and remove the second key 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee 4 Insert a blank Sentry Key into the ignition switch and turn the ignition switch ON within 60 seconds After 10 seconds a single chime will sound The Theft Alarm Light will stop flashing turn on for 3 seconds then turn off The new Sentry Key has been programmed Repeat this procedure to program up to 8 keys If you do not have a programmed sentry key contact your dealer for details General Information The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules part 15 and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undes ired operation SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED The Vehicle Theft Security Alarm VTSA system moni tors the doors trunk and ignition switch for unautho rized operation If something triggers the alarm the system will signal for about 18 minutes For the first 3 minutes the horn will sound intermittently and the headlights park lights taillights and the indicator light in the cluster will flash Then the exterior lights will flash for another 15 minutes Rearming of the
239. next listenable station The button located in the center of the left hand control will tune to the next pre set station that you have programmed in the radio pre set push buttons CD Player Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next track on the CD Pressing the bottom of the switch once will go to the beginning of the current track or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within one second after the current track begins to play If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the second track three times it will play the third etc The button in the center of the left hand switch changes CD s on the 6 Disc in dash CD changer radio This button does not function for all other radios CD DVD DISC MAINTENANCE To keep the CD DVD discs in good condition take the following precautions 1 Handle the disc by its edge avoid touching the surface 2 If the disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge 3 Do not apply paper paper CD labels or tape to the disc avoid scratching the disc 4 Do not use solvents such as benzine thinner cleaners or antistatic sprays 5 Store the disc in its case after playing 6 Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight 190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME 7 Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high CLIMATE CONTROLS The Climate Control System allows you to balance the temperature amount a
240. ng periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield Make sure that they are not frozen to the glass before turning them on to avoid damaging the blade Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement 1 Lift the wiper arm away from the glass 2 Push the release tab shown in the illustration and slide the wiper blade assembly down along the arm Gently place the wiper arm on the windshield 304 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 3 Install the new blade assembly onto the wiper arm tip until it locks in place NOTE Always refer to the wiper blade packaging for specific installation instructions Many wiper blade re placements fit multiple vehicles Windshield Washer Reservoir The washer fluid reservoir is located engine compart ment and should be checked for fluid level at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer sol vent not radiator antifreeze and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water Refer to the appropriate engine diagram at the beginning of this section for the location of the reservoir Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system
241. ng telephone information Strength eases The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate an e Phone status idle voice mail roaming battery ng call strength and signal strength in increments of 20 percent Incom e Call status Incoming call connecting connected air ing Call time in minutes and seconds call ended call failed The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate that roaming and no phone connection H the UConnect phone is currently in analog UConnect Active mode z Analog Caller ID phone number display The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate that When the appropriate conditions exist and if supported the UConnect phone is currently roaming by the cell phone the EVIC will display the following telephone symbols Roam ing 154 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate that you have voice mail Voice Mail The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate a text message Text Message The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate the battery strength of the UConnect phone Battery Strength The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate that a phone connection has been made Call in Progress The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate that the UConnect phone is currently not avail able Not Avail able Navigation If Equipped Navigation Display Control Press and release the MENU button until Navigati
242. nition switch is in the ON or ACC positions Always depress the brake pedal first before moving the gear selector out of PARK NOTE If a malfunction occurs the transaxle will not shift out of park Battery power is required to release the brake transaxle interlock system There is an override system that allows you to shift out of Park in case of loss of power To activate the override system remove the cup holder liner insert a key screwdriver or finger into the front hole and push the lever forward If this occurs obtain service as soon as possible Automatic Transaxle Ignition Interlock System This system prevents the key from being removed unless the shift lever is in PARK It also prevents shifting out of PARK unless the key is in the OFF or ON positions NOTE If a malfunction occurs the system will trap the key in the ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety feature is inoperable The engine can be started and stopped but the key cannot be removed until you obtain service Four Speed or Six Speed AutoStick Automatic Transaxle The electronically controlled transaxle provides a precise shift schedule The transaxle electronics self calibrating therefore the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt This is a normal condition and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles Reset Mode Electronic Transaxle The transaxle is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions
243. nlock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if 1 The Auto Unlock feature is enabled 2 The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed returned to 0 mph 0 km h 3 The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK 4 The driver door is opened 5 The doors were not previously unlocked 6 The vehicle speed is 0 mph 0 km h The Auto Unlock feature can be enabled or disabled Refer to Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped section of this manual For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC the Auto Unlock Feature can be enabled or disabled by performing the following procedure 1 Close all doors and place the key in the ignition 2 Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and back to LOCK 4 times ending up in the LOCK position 3 Depress the power door unlock switch to unlock the doors 4 A single chime will indicate the completion of the programming NOTE Use the Auto Door Locks and Auto Unlock features in accordance with local laws Child Protection Door Lock System Rear Doors The Rear Door Child Protection Locks are located inside the rear edge of the door Insert the tip of the ignition key 26 THINGS KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE or similar flat bladed object into the lock and rotate approximately turn to the lock or unlock position as indicated by the stamped icons Child L
244. nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of directory levels 8 Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders 100 e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator and 3 character extension e Level 2 31 including a separator and 3 character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 WMA files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 WMA playback may result in longer disc loading times If a disc contain multi formats such as CD audio and mp3 wma tracks the radio will only play the mp3 wma tracks on that disc Supported MP3 WMA File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 WMA extension as MP3 WMA files Non MP3 WMA files named with the MP3 WMA extension may cause play back problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 WMA and will not play the file ww massC ws UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 169 When using the MP3 WMA encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 WMA file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR
245. ns Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of files exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this display UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179 e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator and 3 character extension e Level 2 31 including a separator and 3 character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep di
246. ns In winter months make sure the air intake is clear of ice slush and snow A C Air Filter If Equipped An air filter is included in the optional Security Group The filter will reduce but not eliminate diesel and agricultural smells The filter acts on air coming from outside the vehicle and recirculated air within the pas senger compartment The filter s normal service life is 12 000 miles 20 000 km or one year The air filter change schedule coincides with that for engine oil and filter As with oil changes the interval is shorter for heavy duty service or dusty conditions See your authorized dealer for service UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201 Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions HOT WEATHER Open the windows start the vehicle press the button to turn recirculate off AND VEHICLE INTERIOR IS Set the Fan control to the high position full clockwise position Press the 4 VERY HOT button Set the Mode control at or between and 3 Set the temperature O control to full cool After the hot air is pushed from the vehicle press the button to turn recirculate on roll up the windows Once you are comfortable press the button to turn recirculate off and adjust the temperature control for comfort WARM WEATHER Press the button to turn recirculate off V If it s sunny set the Mode control at or near and turn the air conditioning on If x C A it
247. nsors located throughout the vehicle 819bfad4 Automatic Temperature Control The controls on the climate control provide the system with operator input Other sensors take account of ve hicle speed A C pressure outside temperature and engine cooling temperature Using all of these inputs the system automatically adjusts airflow temperature air flow distribution airflow volume and the amount of outside air recirculation This maintains a comfortable temperature even under changing conditions w UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195 Operation of the system is quite simple 1 Turn the Mode Control knob on the right and the Blower Control knob on the left to AUTO NOTE The AUTO position performs best for front seat occupants only 2 Dial in the temperature you would like the system to maintain by rotating the Temperature Control knob Once the comfort level is selected the system will main tain that level automatically using the heating system Should the desired comfort level require air conditioning the system will automatically make the adjustment You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically Selecting the OFF position on the blower control stops the system completely and closes the outside air intake 72 F 22 C is the recommended setting for maximum comfort for the average person however this may vary NOTE The temperature setting can
248. nspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure The manu facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva lent to the originals in size quality and performance when replacement is needed refer to the paragraph on Tread Wear Indicators Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for the size designation of your tire The service description and load identification will be found on the original equipment tire Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety handling and ride of your vehicle We recommend that you contact your original equipment or an autho rized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability 242 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING Do not use tire wheel size or rating other than that specified for your vehicle Some combina tions of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance charac teristics resulting in changes to steering han dling and braking of your vehicle This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity other than what was originally equipped on your vehicle Using a tire with a smaller load index c
249. nt 1 Open the hood and remove the two head lamp mount ing screws 819baSib Removing Head Lamp For Bulb Replacement 2 Remove the push in fasteners by prying under the head of the fasteners with a flat bladed tool 3 Gently pry the head lamp assembly away from the fender as shown in the picture This will free the ball stud from its retainer in the fender Pull the head lamp assembly away from the vehicle 849ba51a Gently Pry Out Head Lamp 4 Rotate bulb and connector turn counterclockwise 5 Pull the bulb out of the socket and replace the bulb waw MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 323 CAUTION Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life 6 If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol 7 Reinsert the bulb and socket assembly and rotate clockwiseYsturn to secure 8 Reinstall the head lamp assembly Fog Lamps 1 Access to the lamps through the lower fascia cutout is limited 2 We recommend you access the lamps by turning the steering wheel to allow access and remove the inner fender shield 3 Rotate bulb and connector A4turn counterclockwise 4 Pull bulb off of connector and replace with a new one CAUTION Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with an oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol 324
250. ntaining Your Vehicle for the location of the reservoir 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES YOUR VEHICLE ww TILT TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column The tilt telescoping control handle is located below the steering wheel at the end of the steering column Tilt Telescoping Steering Wheel Lock To unlock the steering column pull the control handle outward To tilt the steering column move the steering wheel upward or downward as desired To lengthen or shorten the steering column pull the steering wheel outward or push it inward as desired To lock the steering column in position push the control handle inward until fully engaged WARNING Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving The telescoping adjustment must be locked while driv ing Adjusting the steering wheel while driving or driving without the telescoping adjustment locked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED When engaged this device takes over the accelerator operation at speeds greater than 25 mph 40 km h The speed control lever is located on the right side of the steering wheel 81862005 Speed Control Location To Activate Push the ON OFF button located in the end of the Electronic Spe
251. nter of the vehicle Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back Transporting Pets Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break in period is not required for the engine in your new vehicle Drive moderately during the first 300 miles 500 km After the initial 60 miles 100 km speeds up to 50 or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable While cruising brief full throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break in Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high quality energy conserving type lubricant Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur The recommended viscosity and quality grades are shown in Section 7 of this manual NON DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE USED 64 THINGS KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING If you are required to drive with the deck lid open A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles kilometers of operation
252. nths before the onset of freezing weather where applicable If coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance the system should be drained flushed and refilled with fresh coolant Check the front of the A C condenser for any accumulation of bugs leaves etc If dirty clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub ber cracking tears cuts and tightness of the connection at the bottle and radiator Inspect the entire system for leaks Cooling System Drain Flush and Refill At the intervals shown on the Maintenance Schedules the system should be drained flushed and refilled If the solution is dirty or contains a considerable amount of sediment clean and flush with a reliable cooling system cleaner Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals Properly dispose of old antifreeze solution Selection Of Coolant Use only the manufacturers recommended coolant refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct coolant type 306 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Mixing of coolants other than specified HOAT en gine coolants may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection If a non HOAT cool ant is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency it should be replaced with the specified coolant as soon as possible Do not use plain water alone or alcohol
253. o so they can be used rearward facing by children who weigh more than 20 165 9 kg but are less than one year old e Rearward facing child seats must NEVER be used in the front seat of a vehicle with a front passenger airbag An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in this position Older Children and Child Restraints Children who weigh more than 20 Ibs 9 kg and who are older than one year can ride forward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward facing direction are for children who weigh 20 to 40 Ibs 9 to 18 kg and who are older than one year These child seats are also held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system The belt positioning booster seat is for children weighing more than 40 lbs 18 kg but who are still too small to fit the vehicle s seat belts properly If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle s cushion while the child s back is against the seatback then the child should use a Belt Positioning Booster Seat The child and booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt Some booster seats are equipped with a front shield and are held in the vehicle by the lap portion 56 THINGS KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ww WARNING e Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint It could come loose in a collision The child could
254. o change the language that the UConnect system is using e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the language you wish to switch to English Espanol or Francais if so equipped e Continue to follow the system prompts to complete language selection After selecting one of the languages all prompts and voice commands will be in that language NOTE After every UConnect language change op eration only the language specific 32 name phone book is usable The paired phone name is not language specific and usable across all languages Emergency Assistance If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is reachable e Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency number for your area If the phone is not reachable and the UConnect system is operational you may reach the emergency number as follows e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Emergency and the UConnect system will instruct the paired cellular phone to call the emergency num ber This feature is only supported in the USA 84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se NOTE The emergency number dialed is based on the Country where the vehicle is purchased 911 for USA and Canada and 060 for Mexico The number dialed may not be applicable with the available cellular service and area The UConnect system d
255. o learn more about the possible causes of crashes and associated injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle perfor mance In addition to crash investigations initiated by DaimlerChrysler Corporation such investigations may be requested by customers insurance carriers govern ment officials and professional crash researchers such as those associated with universities and with hospital and insurance organizations In the event that an investigation is undertaken by DaimlerChrysler Corporation regardless of initiative the company or its designated representative will first obtain permission of the appropriate custodial entity for the vehicle usually the vehicle owner or lessee before accessing the electronic data stored unless ordered to download data by a court with legal jurisdiction 1 pursuant to a warrant A copy of the data will be provided to the custodial entity upon request General data that does not identify particular vehicles or crashes may be released for incorporation in aggregate crash databases such as those maintained by the US govern ment and various states Data of a potentially sensitive nature such as would identify a particular driver ve hicle or crash will be treated confidentially Confidential data will not be disclosed by DaimlerChrysler Corpora tion to any third party except when 1 Used for research purposes such as to match data with a particular crash record in an aggregate database
256. o prevent fogging when the recirculation button is press and the mode control is set to panel or panel floor the A C will engage automatically e The A C can be deselected manually without disturb ing the mode control selection Air Outlets The airflow from each of the instrument panel outlets can be adjusted for direction and turned on or off to control air flow NOTE For maximum airflow to the rear the center instrument panel outlets can be aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers Economy Mode If economy mode is desired press the A C button to turn off the indicator light and the A C compressor Move the temperature control lever to the desired temperature 194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Air Conditioning Operation Use this button to engage the Air Conditioning A lamp will illuminate when the Air Con ditioning System is engaged 8199ed1e NOTE The air conditioning compressor will not en gage until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds MAX A C For maximum cooling use the A C and recirculate but tons at the same time Automatic Temperature Control ATC If Equipped The Infrared Climate Control System automatically maintains the climate in the cabin of the vehicle at the comfort levels desired by the driver and passenger To accomplish this the system gathers information from the cabin infrared sensor mounted between the sun visors and from various se
257. o the fuel Fuel System Cautions CAUTION Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle s performance e The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance damage the emission control system e An out of tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke your engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate service Contact your dealer for service assistance e The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as octane enhancers is not recommended Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol STARTING AND OPERATING 253 Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you Carbon Monoxide Warnings WARNING Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning e Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as a garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period If the vehicle is stopped in an
258. o the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated NOTE Mixing coolant types will decrease the life of the engine coolant and will require more frequent coolant changes Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of coolant and to insure that coolant will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery bottle The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces WARNING e The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the cooling system pressure cap are a safety pre caution Never add coolant when the engine is overheated Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system To prevent scalding or injury do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle Personal injury or engine damage may result Disposal of Used Engine Coolant Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community To prevent ingestion by animals or children do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the 308 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE r ground If ingested by a child contact a physician immedia
259. ock Control WARNING Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the child protection locks are engaged NOTE For emergency exit with the system engaged move the lock plunger up unlocked position roll down the window and open the door with the outside door handle POWER WINDOWS Power Window Switches The control on the left front door has up down switches that give you fingertip control of all four power win dows There is a single opening and closing switch on the front passenger door and one each on rear doors for window control The windows will operate only when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and for 45 seconds after the ignition is turned OFF or the driver s door is opened This feature can be turned off by your authorized dealer Auto Window Down Express Down If Equipped The driver s window switch has an Auto Down feature for both the driver and passenger front windows The tab is labeled AUTO to indicate this capability Push the window switch past the first detent release and the THINGS KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 window will go down automatically To cancel the Auto Down movement operate the switch either in the up or down direction and release the switch Power Window Auto Up Auto Down Switches NOTE The convenience of one touch down front win dows can also be controlled by
260. oes slightly lower your chances of successfully making a phone call as to that for the cell phone directly Your phone must be turned on and paired to the UConnect system to allow use of this vehicle feature in emergency situations when the cell phone has network coverage and stays paired to the UConnect system Towing Assistance If you need towing assistance e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Towing Assistance NOTE The Towing Assistance number dialed is based on the Country where the vehicle is purchased 1 800 528 2069 for USA 1 877 213 4525 for Canada 55 14 3454 for Mexico City and 1 800 712 3040 for outside Mexico City in Mexico Please refer to the 24 Hour Towing Assistance cover age details in the Warranty information booklet and on 24 Hour Towing Assistance Card Paging To learn how to page refer to Working with Automated Systems Paging works properly except for pagers of certain companies which time out a little too soon to work properly with the UConnect system Voice Mail Calling To learn how to access your voice mail refer to Working with Automated Systems Working with Automated Systems This method is designed to be used in instances where one generally has to press numbers on the cellular phone keypad while navigating through an automated tele phone system ww s UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85
261. of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR WARNING It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident Tongue Weight TW The downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer In most cases it should not be less than or more than 10 of the trailer load You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle Frontal Area The maximum height and maximum width of the front of a trailer and its cargo Weight Carrying Hitch A weight carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the truck These kind of hitches are the most popular on the market today and they re commonly used to tow small and medium sized trailers waw STARTING AND OPERATING 263 Trailer Hitch Classification The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the Max GTW towable for your given drivetrain Trailer Hitch Classificatio
262. olvents or protectants on Yes Essen tials products Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with Mopar Glass Cleaner or any commercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abrasive type cleaner Use caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear quarter window equipped with the radio antenna Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments which may scratch the elements When cleaning the rear view mirror spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic 1 Clean with a wet soft rag A mild soap solution may be used but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag 2 Dry with a soft tissue Cleaning Headlights Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 317 Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output avoid wiping with a dry cloth To remove road dirt wash with a mild soap soluti
263. omeLink Garage Door Opener Transmitter 2 2428 ods oes RR 115 Hood Prop s cerea he E 104 Hood Release 103 Hoses us ox BRK Ee ee ES 309 Ignition OR 10 Key cues Gres tree ge VO Red exe d d eed Be 10 Ignition Key Removal 10 Illuminated Entry 16 Immobilizer Sentry Key 12 Infant Restraint 54 55 Information Center Vehicle 147 Inside Rearview Mirror 70 Instrument Cluster 137 139 Instrument Panel and Controls 136 Instrument Panel Cover 317 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning 316 Integrated Power Module Fuses 318 Interior Appearance Care 315 Interior Lights Introduction te hoe ears 274 Jack Operation vos eve RES 274 276 Jacking Instructions 276 364 INDEX Jump Starting 280 Key Programming 2 22 2 13 Key Replacement 13 Key Sentry Immobilizer 12 Key In Reminder 224 22 209 lt 11 Keyless Entry System Sedan 17 KeyS scare ca tle Re 10 Knee Bolster ves centred nck eR 41 Lane Change and Turn Signals 144 324 Lap Shoulder Belts
264. omentarily or continuously A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial start up e Ft It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru ment cluster airbag warning lamp if a malfunction is noted The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction 48 THINGS KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE www w P WARNING Ignoring the AIRBAG light in your instrument panel could mean you won t have the airbags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come on stays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have the airbag system checked right away Impact Sensors Two sensors located on the front body structure trigger airbag deployment in direct frontal impacts and aid the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC in determining appropriate response to frontal impact events Additional sensors in the ORC determine the level of airbag deploy ment and provide verification Side Inflatable Curtain and Front Seat Mounted Airbags The Occupant Restraint Controller System ORC de ploys the side inflatable curtain and seat mounted thorax side airbags during collision with other vehicles and during collisions where the impact is confined to a particular area of the vehicle such as collisions with poles trees or similar objects It will deploy the side inflatable curtains and front seat thorax mounted airbags only on the impact side of the vehicle The
265. ompt and high quality service The manufacturer s dealers have the facilities factory trained technicians special tools and the latest information to assure your vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner This is why you should always talk to your dealer s service manager first Most matters can be resolved with this process IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 351 e If for some reason you are still not satisfied talk to the general manager or owner of the dealership They want to know if you need assistance e If your dealership is unable to resolve the concern you may contact the Manufacturer s Customer Center Any communication to the Manufacturer s Customer Center should include the following information e Owner s name and address Owner s telephone number home and office Dealership name e Vehicle identification number Vehicle delivery date and mileage DaimlerChrysler Motors Corporation Customer Center P O Box 21 8004 Auburn Hills MI 48321 8004 Phone 800 992 1997 DaimlerChrysler Canada Inc Customer Center Box 1621 Windsor Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone 800 465 2001 In Mexico contact Av Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma 1240 Sante Fe C P 05109 Mexico D In Mexico 915 729 1248 or 729 1240 Outside Mexico 525 729 1248 or 729 1240 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY To assist customers who have hearing difficulties the m
266. on Radio Mode Press the INFO button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only TIME Button Press the TIME button and the time of day will be displayed In AM or FM mode pressing the TIME button will switch between the time and frequency displays Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE control knob Dw UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 161 3 After the hours are adjusted press the right side TUNE control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE control knob Press the TUNE control knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait 5 seconds The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button and selecting the SET HOME CLOCK entry Once in this display follow the above procedure starting at step 2 RW FF Radio Mode Pressing the rewind or fast forward button causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies TUNE Control Radio Mode Turn the right side rotary control clockwise to increase or counter clockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Press the rotary TUNE control knob and BASS will disp
267. on displays in the EVIC When the Navigation System is On the buttons can be used to select the Map or Menu display on the Navigation Unit When the Menu display is active the STEP button can be used to scroll through the list the RESET button can be used to select an item and the AUDIO MODE button can be used to return to the previous menu When the Map display is active pressing the RESET button will change the Navigation Unit Display to the Menu ww UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 155 Turn By Turn Directions The EVIC displays turn by turn directions to a pro grammed destination when Turn By Turn Navigation is enabled through Personal Settings When enabled the EVIC displays the name of the approaching road at the top of the screen followed by an arrow to indicate the direction to turn the vehicle and a count down to indicate the distance to the turn NOTE Refer to your Navigation User s Manual for detailed operating instructions Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features This allows the driver to set and recall features when the automatic transaxle is in PARK Press and release the MENU button until Personal Set tings displays in the EVIC Use the STEP button to display one of the following choices Language When in this display you may select different languages for all display nomenclature including the trip functions Pressing the RESET button while in this display selects English Spani
268. on Ball Joints There are two front suspension lower ball joints that are permanently lubricated Inspect these ball joints when ever under vehicle service is done Damaged seals and their corresponding potentially damaged ball joints must be replaced MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 303 Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points including such items as seat tracks doors liftgate and hood hinges should be lubricated periodically to assure quiet easy operation and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the appli cation of any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular attention should also be given to hood latching compo nents to insure proper function When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year preferably in the fall and spring Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as Mopar Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder Windshield Wiper Blades Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild non abrasive cleaner or use the washer solvent This will remove accumulations of salt waxes or road film and help reduce streaking and smearing Operation of the wipers on dry glass for lo
269. on fol lowed by rinsing Do not use abrasive cleaning components solvents steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses Instrument Panel Cover The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface which minimizes reflections in the windshield Do not use protectants or other products which may cause undesir able reflections Use soap and warm water to restore the low glare surface Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Sun damage can also weaken the fabric If the belts need cleaning use a mild soap solution or lukewarm water Do not remove the belts from the car to wash them Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly Dry with a soft tissue Cleaning The Center Console Cup Holders Removal Grab the rubber portion of the cupholder and lift up ward Cleaning Soak the rubber cupholder liner in a mixture of medium hot tap water and one teaspoon of mild liquid dish soap Let soak for approximately one hour After one hour pull the liner from the water and dip it back into the water about six times This will loosen any remaining debris Rinse the liner thoroughly under warm running water Shake the excess water from the liner and dry the outer surfaces with a clean soft cloth Installation Align the liner in the cupholder and press down firmly 318 MAINTAINING YOUR
270. open area with the engine running for more than a short period adjust the ventilation system to force fresh outside air into the vehicle e Guard against carbon monoxide with proper mainte nance Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly Until repaired drive with all side windows fully open FLEXIBLE FUEL 2 7L ENGINES ONLY EXCEPT CALIFORNIA E 85 General Information The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel ve hicles only These vehicles can be identified by the unique fuel filler door label that states Ethanol E 85 or Un leaded Gasoline Only This section only covers those subjects that are unique to these vehicles Please refer to the other sections of this manual for information on features that are common between Flexible Fuel and gasoline only powered vehicles 254 STARTING AND OPERATING CAUTION Only vehicles with the E 85 fuel filler door label can operate on E 85 ETHANOL FUEL E 85 E 85 is a mixture of approximately 85 fuel ethanol and 15 unleaded gasoline WARNING Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could cause serious personal injury Never have any smok ing materials lit in or near the vehicle when remov ing the fuel filler tube cap gas cap or filling the tank Do not use E 85 as a cleaning agent and never use it near an open flame Fuel Requirements Your vehicle will operate on bo
271. or desert operation e Heavy Loading MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 333 CAUTION NOTE If ANY of these apply to you then change your engine oil every 3 000 miles 5 000 km or 3 months whichever comes first and follow schedule B of the Maintenance Schedules section of this manual NOTE If ANY of these apply to you then change your coolant every 102 000 miles 170 000 km or 60 months whichever comes first and follow schedule B of the Maintenance Schedules section of this manual Second is Schedule A It is for vehicles that are not operated under any of the conditions listed under Sched ule B Use the schedule that best describes your driving condi tions Where time and mileage are listed follow the interval that occurs first NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6000 miles 10 000 km or 6 months whichever comes first Failure to perform the required maintenance items may result in damage to the vehicle At Each Stop for Fuel e Check the engine oil level about 5 minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Checking the oil level while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accu racy of the oil level reading Add oil only when the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark e Check the windshield washer solvent and add if required Once a Month e Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage e Inspect the battery and clean
272. or openers may require you to do this procedure a third time to complete the training Canadian Programming Gate Programming Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig nals to time out or quit after several seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming Similar to this Canadian law some U S gate operators are designed to time out in the same manner If you live in Canada or you are having difficulties programming a gate operator by using the Program ming procedures regardless of where you live replace Programming HomeLink Step 3 with the following 3 Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button while you press and release your hand held transmitter every two seconds until the frequency signal is accepted successfully by HomeLink The Universal Transceiver light will flash slowly and then rapidly when the pro gramming is successful Proceed with Programming HomeLink Step 4 to complete the procedure NOTE When programming such a garage door opener or gate unplug the device to prevent possible damage to the garage door or gate motor Using HomeLink To operate simply press and release the programmed HomeLink button Activation will now occur for the trained device ie garage door opener gate operator security system entry door lock home office lighting etc The light in the display shows that the signal is being transmitted For convenie
273. or vehicle loads that are less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition These pressure con ditions will be found in the Supplemental Tire Pressure Information section of this manual 91124090 Tire Placard Location The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least once a month Use a good quality pocket type gauge to check tire pressure Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated w STARTING AND OPERATING 237 CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap if equipped This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the valve stem Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 km after a 3 hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pres sure molded into the tire sidewall Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with temperature changes Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tir
274. orages can lead to failure of an infant or e Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the seat backs as you remove slack in the strap child restraint The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint e When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint please ensure that all seat belts not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of children It is recommended that before 1 Rotate the cover over the anchor directly behind the installing the child restraint buckle the seat belt so the seat where you are placing the child restraint Installing Child Restrain Tether Strap THINGS KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 between the two posts If not possible lower the head restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard side of the head restraint 3 Attach the tether strap hook A of the child restraint to the anchor and remove slack in the tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer s instruc tions WARNING An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the 81316121 p Cover child Use only the anchor positions directly behind 3 Attaching Strap the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether A Tether Strap and Hook strap B Tether Anchor 2 Rout
275. ore you dial it e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Confirmations The UConnect system will play the current confirmation prompt status and you will be given the choice to change it Phone and Network Status Indicators If available on the radio and or on a premium display such as the instrument panel cluster and supported by your cell phone the UConnect system will provide notification to inform you of your phone and network status when you are attempting to make a phone call using UConnect The status is given for roaming network signal strength phone battery strength etc 86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES YOUR VEHICLE wa Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone keypad and still use the UConnect system while dialing via the cell phone keypad the user must exercise caution and take precautionary safety measures By dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth cellular phone the audio will be played through your vehicle s audio system The UConnect system will work the same as if you dial the number using voice recognition NOTE Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the dial ring to the UConnect system to play it on the vehicle audio system so you will not hear it Under this situation after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that the call did not go through e
276. ormation Placard STARTING AND OPERATING 231 SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL 5 THE COMBINES WEIGHT OF CCCI NEVER EXCEL ON SPARE T125 70045 COLD TI INFLATION PRESSURE 200 29 5 200kPa 28PSI SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 420kPa amp O0PSI 4 109268 Tire and Loading Information 811 bSada This placard tells you important information about the 1 number of people that can be carried in the vehicle 2 the total weight your vehicle can carry 3 the tire size designed for your vehicle 4 the cold tire inflation pressures for the front rear and spare tires 232 STARTING AND OPERATING Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle You will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions tire size and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the Vehicle Loading sec tion of this manual NOTE Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition gross axle weight ratings GAWR s for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded For further information on GAWR s vehicle loading and trailer towing refer to the Vehicle Loading section of this manual To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle locate
277. ould result in tire overloading and failure You could lose control and have an accident Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control CAUTION Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer read ings Alignment And Balance Poor suspension alignment may result in e Fast tire wear e Uneven tire wear such as feathering and one sided wear e Vehicle pull to right or left Tires may also cause the vehicle to pull to the left or right Alignment will not correct this condition See your dealer for proper diagnosis Improper alignment will not cause vehicle vibration Vibration may be a result of tire and wheel out of balance Proper balancing will reduce vibration and avoid tire cupping and spotty wear TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM TPMS IF EQUIPPED Base Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS Operation If Equipped I This is the Tire Pressure Monitoring System warn ing indicator located in the instrument cluster e The Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold placard pressure e The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi 6 9 kPa for every 12 F 6 5 C This means that when the outside temperature decreases the tire pres sure will decrease Tire press
278. oval of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle The most common causes are e Road salt dirt and moisture accumulation Stone and gravel impact Insects tree sap and tar Salt in the air near sea coast localities Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants 314 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE w lt as lt ss Washing Special Care e Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your ve e If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive hicle in the shade using Mopar Car Wash or a mild car wash soap and rinse the panels completely with clear water If insects tar or other similar deposits have accumu lated on your vehicle use Mopar Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove Use Mopar Cleaner Wax to remove road film stains and to protect your paint finish Take care never to scratch the paint Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish CAUTION Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such as steel wool or scouring powder which will scratch metal and painted surfaces near the ocean hose off the undercarriage at least once a month It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors rocker panels and trunk be kept clear and open If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner If your veh
279. ove the key from the ignition and lock all of the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended Power Door Locks A door lock switch is located on the driver and passenger door panel Press this switch to lock or unlock the doors Power Door Lock Switch Automatic Door Locks If Equipped The doors will lock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if all of the following conditions are met 1 The Auto Lock feature is enabled 2 The transmission is in gear 3 All doors are closed 4 The throttle is pressed 5 The vehicle speed is above 15 mph 24 km h 6 The doors were not previously locked using the power door lock switch or remote keyless entry transmitter The Automatic Door Lock feature can be enabled or disabled Refer to Personal Settings Customer Pro grammable Features in the Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC if equipped section of this manual for details For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC the Automatic Door Locks can be enabled or disabled by performing the following procedure 1 Close all doors and place the key in the ignition THINGS KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 2 Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and and back to LOCK 4 times ending up in the LOCK position 3 Depress the power door lock switch to lock the doors 4 A single chime will indicate the completion of the programming Auto Unlock The doors will u
280. placing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle s GVWR and GAWR limits Towing Requirements Trailer Brakes Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury STARTING AND OPERATING 267 An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes When towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system an electronic brake controller is not required Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1 000 Ibs 450 kg and required for trailers in excess of 2 000 Ibs 907 kg CAUTION If the trailer weighs more than 1 000 lbs 450 kg loaded it should have its own brakes and they should be of adequate capacity Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear higher brake pedal effort and longer stopping distances 268 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle s hy draulic brake lines It can overload your brake sys tem and cause it to fail You might not have brakes when you need them and could have an accident Towing any trailer will increase your stopping dis tance When towing you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you Failure to do so could result in an
281. plement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system 4 Speedometer Indicates vehicle speed 5 Tachometer The white area of the scale shows the permissible engine revolutions per minute rpm x 1000 for each gear range Before reaching the red area ease up on the accelerator to prevent engine damage 140 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL a 6 Low Fuel Light When the fuel level drops to 2 gallons the fuel symbol will light and a single chime will sound 7 Charging System Light This light shows the status of the electrical charging system The light should come on briefly when the ignition is first turned on and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light stays on or comes on while driving turn off some of the vehicle s electrical devices such as the Fog Lights or Rear Defroster If the Charging System Light remains on it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system Obtain SERVICE IMMEDI ATELY See your local authorized dealer 8 Airbag Light The light comes on and remains on for 6 to 8 V seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light does not come on during starting stays on or comes on while driving have the system checked by an authorized dealer 9 Theft Alarm Light If Equipped This light will flash rapidly for several seconds when the alarm system is arming The light will begin to flash slowly indicating
282. ples on how to calculate total load cargo luggage and towing capaci ties of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle NOTE For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 165 392 Kg 234 STARTING AND OPERATING Occupants Combined weight of AVAILABLE occupants and cargo MINUS Combined Occupant s Cargo Luggage and from Tire Placard weight Trailer Tongue Weight Occupant 1 200 Ibs EXAMPLE 1 Occupant 2 bs s 865 Ibs 195 Ibs EXAMPLE 2 T COecupant 1 210 Ibs 3 Occupant 2 180 tbs m Oocupant 2 150 ths TOTAL WEIGHT 540 Ibs 540 Ibs 325 Ibs EXAMPLE 3 Occupant 1 200 Ibs Gecupante 200 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 4G0 Ibs 865 Ibs 400 Ibs 465 Ibs 811a4d11 STARTING AND OPERATING 235 WARNING 1 Safety Overloading of your tires is dangerous Overloading WARNING can cause tire failure affect vehicle handling and Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause accidents increase your stopping distance Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle Never overload them e Under inflation increases tire flexing and can result in tire failure TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION Over inflation reduces a tire s
283. puter scanner to read the Vehicle Identification Number VIN Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers and cargo The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR WARNING Because the front wheels steer the vehicle it is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident Overloading The load carrying components axle springs tires wheels etc of your vehicle will provide satisfactory service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and front and rear GAWR The best way to figure out the total weight of your vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for operation Weigh it on a commercial scale to insure that it is not over the GVWR Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle separately It is important that you distribute the load evenly over the front and rear axles 260 STARTING AND OPERATING Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and shorten useful service life Heavier axles or suspension components do not necessa
284. r Use API Certified engine oil SAE 10W 30 is recommended Refer to the engine oil viscosity chart for the correct SAE grade meeting DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Oil Filter 2 4 Liter Mopar 04884900 or equivalent Oil Filter 2 7 amp 3 5 Liter Mopar 05281090 or equivalent Spark Plugs Refer to the Vehicle Emission Control Information label in the engine com partment Fuel Selection 2 4 amp 2 7 Liter 87 Octane Fuel Selection 3 5 Liter 87 to 89 Octane MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 329 Chassis Component Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts Automatic Transmission Mopar ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid Brake Master Cylinder Mopar DOT 3 and SAE J1703 should be used If DOT 3 brake fluid is not available then DOT 4 is acceptable Use only recommended brake fluids Power Steering Reservoir Mopar ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid Information Provided DEALER MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS Ill Emission Control System Maintenance 332 Schedule os Maintenance 5 332 Schedule A uos ges aas M A C E 5 C H E D U L E 5 8 M A T E N A N C E S C H D U L 5 8 332 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE The Scheduled maintenanc
285. r cylinder drops the brake warning indicator will light WARNING Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is danger ous A significant decrease in braking performance or vehicle stability during braking may occur It will take you longer to stop the vehicle or will make your vehicle harder to control You could have an acci dent Have the vehicle checked immediately Anti Lock Brake System ABS If Equipped The Anti Lock Brake System provides increased vehicle stability and brake performance under most braking conditions The system automatically pumps the brakes during severe braking conditions to prevent wheel lock up WARNING Pumping of the Anti Lock Brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to an accident Pumping makes the stopping distance longer Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop STARTING AND OPERATING 219 WARNING Anti lock system ABS cannot prevent the natu ral laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency be yond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded The ABS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydro planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a
286. r leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be injured Don t leave the keys in the ignition A child could operate power windows other con trols or move the vehicle Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving Failure to do so can lead to brake failure and an accident BRAKE SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with power assisted brakes as standard equipment In the event power assist is lost for any reason for example repeated brake applications with the engine off the brakes will still function How ever the effort required to brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required with the power system oper ating WARNING Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly an accident Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You wouldn t have your full braking capacity in an emergency 218 STARTING AND OPERATING If either of the two hydraulic systems lose normal capa bility the remaining system will still function with some loss of overall braking effectiveness This will be evident by increased pedal travel during application and greater pedal force required to slow or stop In addition if the malfunction is caused by an internal leak as the brake fluid in the maste
287. r service plan provides three way calling this feature can be accessed through the UConnect system Check with your cellular service provider for the features that you have Answer or Reject an Incoming Call No Call Currently in Progress When you receive a call on your cellular phone the UConnect system will interrupt the vehicle audio system if on and will ask if you would like to answer the call Press Phone button to accept the call To reject the call press and hold the Phone button until you hear a single beep indicating that the incoming call was rejected Answer or Reject an Incoming Call Call Currently in Progress If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your cell phone Press the Phone button to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call NOTE The UConnect system compatible phones in market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress Therefore the user can only either answer an incoming call or ignore it Making a Second Call while Current Call in Progress To make a second call while you are currently in a call press the Voice Recognition button and say Dial or Call followed by the phone number or phone book entry you wish to call The first call will be on hold while the second call is in progress To go back to
288. rbag Special Features A new active venting front passenger airbag is designed to reduce the risk of occupants who may be out of position by the use of active vents positioned on each side of the airbag Supplemental Front Seat Mounted Thorax Side Airbags Front seat mounted side Thorax airbags provide en hanced protection and work together with supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC to help protect an occupant during a side impact The seat mounted side airbag is marked with an airbag label sewn into the outboard side of the seat THINGS KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 81956231 Seat mounted Side Airbag Label When the bag deploys it opens the seam between the front and side of the seat s trim cover Each bag deploys independently that is a left side impact deploys the left bag only and a right side impact deploys only the right bag Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain SABIC Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain SABIC Airbags offer side impact protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants in addition to that provided by the body structure Each airbag features inflated chambers place adjacent to the head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential for side impact head injuries The curtains deploy downward covering both windows on the impact side Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC Location 44 THINGS KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ww
289. reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others The ABS light monitors the Anti Lock Brake System The light will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds If the ABS light remains on or comes on while driving it indicates that the Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti Lock brakes If the ABS light does not come on when the Ignition switch is turned to the ON position have the bulb repaired as soon as possible If both the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Light remain on the Anti Lock brakes ABS and Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD systems are not function ing Immediate repair to the ABS system is required When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph 11 km h you may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some related motor noises These noises are the system per forming its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS system is working properly This self check occurs each time the vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph 11 km h 220 STARTING AND OPERATING ABS is activated during braking under certain road or WARNIN
290. release simply unbuckle the seat belt by depressing the button allowing the webbing to retract into the retractor In the rear seat you may have trouble tightening the lap shoulder belt on the child restraint because the buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening on the restraint Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle end belt several times to shorten it Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out If the belt still can t be tightened or if by pulling and pushing on the restraint loosens the belt you may need to do something more Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle turn the buckle around and insert the latch plate into the buckle again If you still can t make the child restraint secure try a different seating position Children Too Large For Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seat back should use the lap shoulder belt in a rear seat THINGS KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 e Make sure that the child is upright in the seat The lap portion should low on the hips and as snug as possible e Check belt fit periodically A child s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the child closer to the ce
291. rily increase the vehicle s GVWR Loading To load your vehicle properly first figure out its empty weight axle by axle and side by side Store heavier items down low and be sure you distribute their weight as evenly as possible Stow all loose items securely before driving If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you have exceeded either GAWR but the total load is within the specified GVWR you must redistribute the weight Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate A loaded vehicle is shown in the illustration Note that neither the GVWR nor the GAWR capacities have been exceeded Vehicle with a GVWR of 4480 EXAMPLE ONLY Front Axle Rear Axle Empty Weight 1853 Ibs 1631 Ibs 841 kg 740 kg Load Including driver 271 165 579 Ibs passengers and cargo 123 kg 263 kg Total 2124 lbs 2210 Ibs 963 kg 1002 kg GAWR 2195 Ibs 2285 lbs 997 kg 1036 kg NOTE Refer to the Vehicle Certification Label at tached to the rear of the driver s door for your vehicle s GVWR and GAWR s This table is only an example STARTING AND OPERATING 261 TRAILER TOWING In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle Before towing a trailer carefully re view this information to tow your load as efficiently and
292. rks best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat at the windshield This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield Defrost Mode 5 Air is directed through the windshield and side window demist outlets Use this mode with maxi mum blower and temperature settings for best wind shield and side window defrosting NOTE The air conditioning compressor operates in Floor Mix and Defrost or a blend of these modes even if the Air Conditioning Snowflake button is not pressed ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193 This dehumidifies the air to help dry the windshield To improve fuel economy use these modes only when necessary Recirculation Control Use this button to choose be tween outside air intake or recirculation of the air inside the vehicle A lamp will illu minate when you are in recir culate mode Only use the re circulate mode to temporarily block out any outside odors smoke or dust and to cool the interior rapidly upon initial start up in very hot or humid weather 8158ccHd NOTE e Continuous use of the recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur Extended use of this mode is not recommended e In cold or damp weather the use of the recirculation mode will cause windows to fog on the inside because of moisture build up inside the vehicle For maximum defogging select the Outside Air position e order t
293. rn will chip once to acknowledge the lock signal If desired the Sound Horn On Lock feature can be turned on or off On electronic vehicle information center EVIC equipped vehicles refer to Personal Settings in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC sec tion of this manual On non equipped vehicles perform the following steps 1 Press the LOCK button for 4 to 10 seconds 2 While the LOCK button is pressed after 4 seconds press the PANIC button Release both buttons The Sound Horn On Lock feature can be reactivated by repeating this procedure To Unlatch the Trunk Press the trunk button on the transmitter two times to unlatch the trunk w THINGS KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 Using The Express Down Window Feature If Equipped The key fob remotely lowers both driver and passenger front windows simultaneously Lowering the front win dows using the key fob is a two step operation 1 Press the unlock button once 2 Press the unlock button a second time and hold the button until the glass lowers completely or the windows drop to the desired level Using The Panic Alarm To turn the panic alarm feature ON or OFF press and hold the PANIC button on the transmitter for at least one second and release When the panic alarm is on the headlights and park lights will flash the horn will pulse on and off and the interior lights will turn on The panic alarm will st
294. rrected w MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 321 VEHICLE STORAGE If you will not be using your vehicle for more than 21 days you may want to take steps to preserve your battery You may e Disengage the mini fuse in the Power Distribution Center labeled Ignition Off Draw e Or disconnect the negative cable from the battery REPLACEMENT BULBS All the inside bulbs are brass or glass wedge base Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should not be used for replacement LIGHT BULBS Interior Bulb Number Front Courtesy Reading Lights 578 WS5W Center Courtesy Reading Lights 578 W5W Visor Vanity Lights A6220 Glove Box 194 Shift Indicator Light JKLE14140 Rear Compartment Trunk Light 579 NOTE For lighted switches see your dealer for re placement instructions LIGHTS BULBS Outside Bulb No Low Beam 9006 High Beam 9005 Front Park Turn Signal Side Marker Light 3157AK Front Fog Light 9145 H10 Serviced at Dealer Center High Mounted Stop Light CHMSL LED Assembly Rear Tail Stoperi iet eS RE LAUR teas q 3057 Rear Tum Signal ireua ea e es 3157AK Backup W16W 921 License Light uu cesses eR eser 168 322 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE BULB REPLACEMENT Head Lamp Bulb Replaceme
295. rvice station 9 Remove the wheel blocks and lower the jack until it is free Reassemble the lug wrench to the jack assembly and stow it in the spare tire area Secure the assembly using the means provided WARNING A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve hicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided 10 Place the deflated flat tire in the cargo area have the tire repaired or replaced as soon as possible WARNING A loose tire thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could injure the occupants in the vehicle Have the deflated flat tire repaired or replaced immedi ately 11 Check the tire pressure as soon as possible Correct pressure as required 280 WHAT DO EMERGENCIES a ww nvEvr n a a JUMP STARTING PROCEDURES DUE A LOW WARNING BATTERY Jump starting remote battery terminals are located under Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when the hood ever the hood is raised It can start anytime the The battery is stored between the left front head lamp On AC Cait De MUN by Hie tat assembly and the left front wheel splash shield Access is Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get through the splash shield it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic transaxle cannot be started this way Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has starte
296. s This feature is only available if you have Remote Keyless Entry The lights will fade to off after about 30 seconds or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition switch is turned on NOTE e The front courtesy overhead console and door cour tesy lights do not turn on if the dimmer control is in the interior lights ON position extreme top position e The illuminated entry system will not operate if the dimmer control is in the defeat position extreme downward position w THINGS KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and trunk or activate the panic alarm from distances a maxi mum of 66 feet 20 meters using a hand held radio transmitter The transmitter need not be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system 81961922 Five Button Vehicle Key NOTE The line of transmission must not be blocked with metal objects To unlock the doors Press and release the UNLOCK button on the key fob once to unlock only the driver s door or twice to unlock all the doors When the UNLOCK button is pressed the illuminated entry will initiate the parking lights will flash on twice and the headlights will remain on The time for headlamp delay is programmable on vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Headlamps Off Delay under Personal Settings in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
297. s cloudy or dark set the Mode control at or near 22 COOL OR COLD Press the G5 button to turn recirculate off HUMID CONDITIONS If it s sunny set the Mode control at or between 52 and then turn the air TY conditioning on If it s cloudy or dark set the Mode control at or near and turn 446 2 the air conditioning on If the windows begin to fog set Mode control at or between i and S COLD BRY Set the Mode control at ot near a If it is sunny you may want more upper air In CONDITIONS this case set the Mode control at or between 4 and 23 In very cold weather A if you need extra heat at the windshield set the Mode control at or near the 8160H80a 202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Electric Rear Window Defroster 1 Press this button located on the Blower Control CAUHON knob to turn on the rear window defroster and the To avoid damaging the electrical conductors of the heated side mirrors if equipped A light in the button rear window defroster do not use scrapers sharp will illuminate to indicate the rear window defroster is instruments chemically harsh or abrasive window ON The defroster automatically turns off after about 10 cleaners on the interior surface of the window minutes of operation Labels can be gently peeled off after soaking with war
298. sc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates MPEG Specifi cation Sampling Fre quency kHz Bit Rate kbps 320 256 224 192 160 128 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 160 128 144 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 24 16 8 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 103 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 48 44 1 32 MPEG 2 Audio Layer 3 24 22 05 16 Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported 180 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL w FCca Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will
299. seat The rear switch controls the seatback recliner Power Seat Switches w UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99 CAUTION Do not place any article under a power seat as it may cause damage to the seat controls Heated Seats If Equipped WARNING Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use exhaus tion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods of time Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion This may cause the seat heater to overheat This feature heats leather or cloth front driver and passenger seats The controls for the heated seats are located in the center console above the climate controls There are indicator lights in the switches which indicate a low heat setting one lamp lit or high heat setting 2 lamps lit Heated Seat Switches 100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES YOUR VEHICLE ww Fold Flat Front Passenger Seat The hard seatback features a work surface and a molded The recline handle on the front passenger seat also rim for retaining items stored on the seat back panel releases the seatback to fold forward ii Fold Flat Front Passenger Seat Seat Back Fold Forward wn UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES YOUR VEHIC
300. sed consistent gasoline specifica tions the World Wide Fuel Charter WWFC which define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions engine performance and durability for your vehicle The manufacturer recommends the use of gaso lines that meet the WWFC specifications if they are available STARTING AND OPERATING 251 Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as Reformulated Gasoline Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are spe cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im prove air quality The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso lines Properly blended reformulated gasolines will pro vide excellent performance and durability of engine and fuel system components Gasoline Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy genates such as 10 ethanol MTBE and ETBE Oxygen ates are required in some areas of the country during the winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in your vehicle CAUTION 2 4L and 3 5L Engines If Equipped DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or E85 Ethanol Use of these blends may result in starting and driveability problems and may damage critical fuel system components NOTE 2 7L Engine If Equipped is now rated for 5 E85 Ethanol use EXCEPT CALIFORNIA EMISSION STATES Only ve
301. sh French German Italian or Dutch de pending on availability As you continue the displayed information will be shown in the selected language NOTE UConnect language will not change using the EVIC Please refer to Language Selection in the HANDS FREE COMMUNICATION UConnect sec tion of this manual for details Auto Door Locks When ON is selected all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph 24 km h To make your selection press and hold the RESET button until ON or OFF appears Auto Unlock on Exit When ON is selected all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the P Park or N Neutral position and the driver s door is opened To make your selection press and hold the RESET button until ON or OFF appears 156 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Remote Key Unlock Driver Door 1st When Driver Door 1st Press is selected only the driver s door will unlock on the first press of the remote keyless entry unlock button When Driver Door 1st Press is selected you must press of the remote keyless entry unlock button twice to unlock the passenger s doors When Doors 1st Press is selected all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the remote keyless entry unlock button To make your selection press and release the RESET button until Driver Door 1st Press or Doors 1st Press appears Sound Hor
302. sh and replace engine coolant at 60 X months or 102 000 miles 170 000 km whichever comes first ww SCHEDULE 343 Miles Kilometers 108 000 180 000 111 000 185 000 114 000 190 000 117 000 195 000 120 000 200 000 Change engine oil and oil filter or at 3 months whichever comes first X X X X Replace engine air cleaner filter Rotate tires Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct stowage x gt gt Change Automatic Transaxle Fluid and Filter Inspect brake linings X gt Replace Spark Plugs 2 4L Engine gt Replace the accessory drive belt every 120 000 miles 200 000 km M A A N C E 5 C H D U L E 5 8 M A T E N A N C E S C H D U L 5 8 344 SCHEDULE A Schedule Miles 6 000 12 000 18 000 24 000 30 000 Kilometers 10 000 20 000 30 000 40000 50 000 Months 6 12 18 24 30 Change engine oil and oil filter X X X X X Replace engine air cleaner filter X Rotate tires X Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct X stowage Inspect brake linings X Replace Spark Plugs 2 4L Engine X SCHEDULE 345 not replaced at 102 000 miles 170 000 km Miles 36 000 42 000 48 000 54000 60 000 Kilometers
303. sicl Classic Rock Cls Rock College College Country Country Foreign Language Language Information Inform Jazz Jazz w UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 175 News News If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Nostalgia Nostalga Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station Oldies Oldies _ FD Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between Public Public p Rien and Bes R amp B the following items 41 Set Clock Pressing the SELECT button will allow user to set the clock Turn TUNE control knob to adjust Religious Talk Rel Talk the hours then press and turn the TUNE control knob Rock Rock to adjust the minutes Press the TUNE control knob Soft Soft again to save changes Soft Rock Soft Rck AM and FM Buttons Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R amp B Press buttons to select AM or FM Modes Sports Sports SET Button To Set the Push Button Memory Talk Talk When you are receiving a station that you wish to Top 40 Top 40 commit to push button memory press the SET button Weather Weather The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into push button
304. simply opened by pulling on the glow in the dark handle attached to the trunk latching mechanism See picture wF THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems The following safety features are standard on all vehicles e Three point lap and shoulder belts for all seating positions Pretensioning and load limiting retractors for the front seat belts e Advanced multistage driver and new active vent front passenger airbags Knee Bolsters Blockers for front seat occupants e An energy absorbing steering column and steering wheel e Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC that span the front and second rows for sedans e Supplemental seat side Thorax airbags for sedans e Supplemental seat side and head airbags for convert ibles e Front seat belt retractors incorporate pretensioners to enhance occupant protection by managing occupant energy during an impact event e All seat belt systems except the driver s include Automatic Locking Retractors ALR s which lock the seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large item in a seat If you will be carrying children too small for adult size seat belts your seat belts or the LATCH feature also can be used to hold infant and child restraint sys
305. sk of injury in a collision Only use when the lap belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug and in the recommended seating positions Remove and store the extender when not needed Supplemental Restraint System SRS Airbag This vehicle has airbags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems The driver s front airbag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel The passenger s front airbag is mounted in the instrument panel above the glove compartment The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag covers DRIVER AIRBAG PASSENGER AIRBAG KNEE BOLSTER B133bd65 Front Airbag Components NOTE The front airbags are certified to the Federal e regulations that allow less forceful deployment The front airbags have a multistage inflator design This e may allow the airbag to have different rates of inflation that are based on collision severity and occupant size This vehicle may also be equipped with window bags to protect the driver front and rear passengers sitting next to a window If the vehicle is equipped with window bags they are located above the side windows Their covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG NOTE Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open to allow airbag deploy e ment Airbag System Components The airbag system consists of the following e Occupant Restraint Controller ORC e AIRBAG Li
306. speed change on moderate hills is normal On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without speed control GARAGE DOOR OPENER HomeLink IF EQUIPPED The HomeLink Universal Transceiver replaces up to three remote controls hand held transmitters that oper ate devices such as garage door openers motorized gates or home lighting It triggers these devices at the push of a button The Universal Transceiver operates off your vehicle s battery and charging system no batteries are needed NOTE The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is dis abled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active For additional information on HomeLink call 1 800 355 3515 or on the internet at www homelink com The three buttons for your garage door opener will be located in the driver s sunvisor The training procedure is the same regardless of the 3 button location Programming The Universal Transceiver HomeLink NOTE When programming a garage door opener it is advised to park outside the garage and with the engine off It is also recommended that you install a new battery 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES YOUR VEHICLE ww in the hand held transmitter of the device being pro grammed This will allow for quicker training and accu rate transmission of the radio frequency signal If your garage door opener located in the garage is equipped with an antenna make sure that the antenn
307. st slowly at first and then quicker the longer the button is held 81972259 158 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME ELECTRONIC DIGITAL CLOCK The clock and radio each use the display panel built into the radio A digital readout shows the frequency and or time in hours and minutes depending on your radio model whenever the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position When the ignition switch is in the OFF position or when the radio frequency is being displayed time keep ing is accurately maintained On the AM FM CD 6 disc radio the time button alter nates the location of the time and frequency on the display On the AM FM CD single disc radio only one of the two time or frequency is displayed Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the time button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune Audio control 3 After the hours are adjusted press the right side Tune Audio control to set the minutes 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune Audio control 5 To exit press any button knob or wait approximately 5 seconds RADIO GENERAL INFORMATION Radio Broadcast Signals Your new radio will provide excellent reception under most operating conditions Like any system however car radios have performance limitations due to mobile op eration and natural phenomena which might lead you to believe your sound system is malfunctioning To help
308. stem If Equipped Remote start conveniently starts the engine from outside the vehicle by using the Remote Keyless Entry RKE key fob while maintaining security The system has a targeted range of 328 ft 100 m The vehicle must be locked the deck lid and hood closed and the transmission in Park in order to start the engine using the Remote Start button on the key fob NOTE Remote start requires automatic transaxle equipped vehicles How To Use Remote Start To enter the Remote Start mode depress the Remote Start button twice on the key fob The engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the remote start mode for a 15 minute cycle 22 THINGS KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE www amp 193fa7a REMOTE START BUTTON To exit the Remote Start mode allow the x2 engine to run the cycle or depress the unlock button to disarm the Vehicle Theft Security Alarm and within one minute insert the key into the ignition and turn the ignition to the RUN position The ignition must be in the RUN position in order to drive the vehicle NOTE The engine be started two consecutive times two 15 minute cycles by using the key fob For a third cycle the key must be cycled to the ignition RUN position and then repeat the start sequence To shut off the vehicle when it is in Remote Start mode press the remote start button once In order to avoid inadvertent shut downs the one time press to shut down the vehi
309. stery Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather upholstery Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar Total Clean Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid Please do not use polishes oils cleaning fluids solvents deter gents or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition WARNING Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm 316 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE YES Essentials Fabric Cleaning Procedure If Equipped YES Essentials seats may be cleaned in the following manner e Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with a clean dry towel e Blot any remaining stain with a clean damp towel For tough stains apply Mopar Total Clean or a mild soap solution to a clean damp cloth and remove stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e For grease stains apply Mopar Multi Purpose Cleaner to a clean damp cloth and remove stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e Do not use any s
310. take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc LIST Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE control knob Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after 5 seconds INFO Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if available Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO button for 3 seconds or more and radio will display song titles for each file Press and hold the INFO button again for 3 seconds to return to elapsed time display w UNDERSTANDING
311. te Mode RSC Radios 184 Satellite Antenna 184 Reception Quality cree ea 184 Operating Instructions Satellite Mode 184 w UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 135 Operating Instructions CD Player 2 2222 a ete Ree 189 186 CD DVD Disc Maintenance 189 Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES If Equipped 186 E Climate Contes sh 058453 c5Se Send sages 190 li Video Entertainment System jr ces E If Equipped 187 Sr ans qud peg Radio Operation And Cellular 188 UIS lf Equipped cene RR eR Remote Sound System Controls If Equipped 2 188 sap eager pee hens ndis Electric Rear Window Defroster 202 Radio Operation 189 136 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES x 7 Glove Box 10 Ash Tray rS 5 i nd Demist Outlets 2 ae 8 Heated Seat Switch 11 Climate Control TA aaa 9 Hazard Warning Flasher 12 Trunk Release 3 Instrument Cluster Passenger Airbag Blai5cB Instrument Panel UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 137 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER BASE B18Tbd24 138 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLU
312. te to Administrator NHTSA 400 Seventh Street SW Washington DC 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov http www NHTSA gov In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should contact the Customer Service Department imme diately Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should write to Transport Canada Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls 2780 Sheffield Road Ottawa Ontario K1B 3V9 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below Visa Mas tercard American Express and Discover orders are ac cepted If you prefer mailing your payment please call for an order form NOTE street address is required when ordering manuals No P O Boxes e Service Manuals These comprehensive service manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing troubleshooting problem solving maintaining servicing and repairing DaimlerChrysler 354 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ua Corporation vehicles A complete working knowledge of the vehicle system and or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations dia grams and charts Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Filled with diagrams charts and detailed illustrations these practical manuals make it eas
313. tely Clean up any ground spills immediately Coolant Level 4 Cylinder Engines the coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is adequate With the engine idling and warm to normal operating temperature the level of the coolant in the bottle should be between the ADD and Full lines shown on the bottle 6 Cylinder Engines the level of the coolant in the pressurized coolant bottle should be between the cold and full range on the bottle when the engine is cold The radiator normally remains completely full so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for coolant freeze point or replacing coolant Advise your service attendant of this As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month When additional coolant is needed to maintain the proper level it should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill Points To Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles a few kilometers of operation you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment This is normally a result of moisture from rain snow or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor ized when the thermostat opens allowing hot coolant to enter the radiator If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be safely driven The vapor wi
314. tems NOTE The front airbags have a multi stage inflator design This allows the airbag to have different rates of inflation that are based on collision severity Please pay close attention to the information in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible 32 THINGS KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING In a collision you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buck led up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even on short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause a collision that includes you This can happen far away from home or on your own street Research has shown that seat belts save lives and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times Lap Shoulder Belts All the seats in your vehicle are equipped with Lap Shoulder Belts The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during very sudden stops or collisions This fea
315. tenna Satellite Radio 184 Antifreeze Engine Coolant 305 327 Disposal 22455035 s Ee G44 307 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 218 Anti Theft Security Alarm Theft Alarm 14 Appearance Car 313 Ashtfay Pheer ares E E 126 Auto Up Power Windows 27 122 Automatic Dimming Mirror 70 Automatic Door Locks 24 25 Automatic Transaxle 10 207 211 312 Adding Fluid 312 329 Fluid Level Check 2 2 312 Interlock System 11 212 Reset Mod sae had 212 Selection Of Lubricant 329 Shitting sers eee Pb as ee ER 213 Special Additives 313 Autostick cose br bbb was ga dhe 214 Ball JOINTS 302 Battery 455 556 Y oe es 300 Gas Caution o eas Ee dx Ee hrs 300 INDEX 359 Keyless Transmitter Replacement 20 Location iuro ox RUE OR ee 300 Body Mechanism Lubrication 303 B Pillar Location 231 Brake Assist System 221 Brake Parking asa eret Oa 216 Brake System i eae on ei aden 217 310 Anti Lock ABS 218 Bluid CHECK 41 29 RR ye 329 FOSES Lc Rae rto geo s om e esee gis 310 Master Cylinder 225525045459 rm eene 311 Parking usa asss e ex 216 Warning 0
316. th unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 or E 85 fuel or any mixture of these two For best results a refueling pattern that alternates be tween E 85 and unleaded gasoline should be avoided When you do switch fuels it is recommended that e you do not switch when the fuel gauge indicates less than 1 4 full e you do not add less than 5 gallons when refueling e you operate the vehicle immediately after refueling for a period of at least 5 minutes Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard starting and or significant deterioration in drivability during warm up NOTE When the ambient temperature is above 90 F you may experience hard starting and rough idle follow ing start up even if the above recommendations are followed STARTING AND OPERATING 255 Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles E 85 and Gasoline Vehicles Whether operating the vehicle on an E 85 ethanol fuel or unleaded gasoline the engine oil requirements are the same Refer to Engine Oil Selection in the Maintenance Procedures section of this manual for the proper quality and viscosity engine oil NOTE Your engine oil filler cap also describes the correct engine oil to use Starting The characteristics of E 85 fuel make it unsuitable for use when ambient temperatures fall below 0 F In the range of 0 F to 32 F you may experience an increase in the time it takes for your engine to start and a deteriora
317. that causes airbag deployment with the vehicle stopped and the vehicle communication network intact and the power intact the Enhanced Accident Response System performs the following func tions e At no time should any supplemental restraint system SRS component or SRS related component or fas tener be modified or replaced with any part except those which are approved by DaimlerChrysler Mopar e Cuts off fuel to the engine e Flashes hazard lights 50 THINGS KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ww Turns on the interior lamps which remain on as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is removed Unlocks the doors automatically If A Deployment Occurs The airbag systems are designed to deploy when the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC detect a moderate to severe collision to help restrain the driver and front passenger and then immediately deflate NOTE A frontal collision that is not severe enough to need airbag protection will not activate the system This does not mean something is wrong with the airbag system If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags any or all of the following may occur e The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra sions and or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor They are not caused by contact
318. the measured tire pressure is 30 psi 207 kPa a temperature drop to 20 F 7 C will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 26 psi 179 kPa This tire pressure is 244 STARTING AND OPERATING sufficiently low enough to turn ON the Tire Pressure Monitoring Light Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 30 psi 207 kPa but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Light will still be ON In this situation the Tire Pressure Monitoring Light will turn OFF only after the tires have been inflated to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value Premium System If Equipped The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module NOTE Itis particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain the proper pressure The TPMS consists of the following components Receiver Module e 4 Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors e 3 Trigger Modules mounted in three of the four wheel wells e Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC e Yellow Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings The Tire Pressure Monitoring Tellt
319. the setting 3 If no changes are made within 5 seconds of accessing the Setup screen the screen will time out and you will be taken to the last mode NOTE To reset the clock select the appropriate time zone and press ENTER The clock will revert to the accurate time based on the time zone you selected Changing the Time Zone 1 Highlight Clock Setup and press ENTER 2 At the Clock Setup screen highlight the box next to Time Zone and press ENTER 3 Highlight the appropriate time zone for you location and press ENTER to store your selection Select Done when finished es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183 NOTE When you are traveling and enter a new time zone the cluck must be reset manually for the new zone Changing Daylight Savings Time 1 Highlight the box next to Time and press ENTER 2 Select Daylight Savings when Daylight Savings Time is in effect or Select Standard if Daylight Savings Time is not being observed press ENTER 3 Select Done when finished Select Done to exit from the clock setting mode SATELLITE RADIO IF EQUIPPED Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast ing technology to provide clear digital sound coast to coast The subscription service provider is Sirius Satel lite Radio This service offers up to 100 channels of music sports news entertainment and programming for chil dren directly from its satellites and broadcasting stud
320. the BAS system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your authorized dealer as soon as possible 24 Anti Lock Warning Light ABS If Equipped This light monitors the Anti Lock Brake Sys tem ABS described elsewhere in this manual This light will come on when the ignition key is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds If the ABS light remains on or comes on during driving it indicates that the Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required however the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally provided that the BRAKE warning light is not on If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefit of Anti Lock Brakes UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 145 The warning light should be checked frequently to assure that it is operating properly Turn the ignition key to the on position but do not start the vehicle The light should come on If the light does not come on have the system checked by an authorized dealer 25 High Beam Indicator gt This light shows that the headlights are on high beam Push the turn signal lever away from the steering wheel to switch the headlights from high or low beam 26 Brake System Warning Light This light monitors various bra
321. the first call refer to Ioggling Between Calls To combine two calls refer to Conference Call Place Retrieve a Call from Hold To put a call on hold press the Phone button until you hear a single beep This indicates that the call is on hold To bring the call back from hold press and hold the Phone button until you hear a single beep 82 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES YOUR VEHICLE Toggling Between Calls If two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press the Phone button until you hear a single beep indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls have switched Only one call can be placed on hold at one time Conference Call When two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press and hold the Phone button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Three Way Calling To initiate three way calling press the Voice Recogni tion button while a callis in progress and make a second phone call as described under Making a Second Call while Current Call in Progress After the second call has established press and hold the Phone button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Call Termination To end a call in progress momentarily press the button Only the active call s will be terminated and if there is a call on hold
322. the name the UConnect system will ask you which designation you wish to delete home work mobile pager or all Say the designation you wish to delete e Note that only the phone book entry in the current language is deleted Delete All Entries in the UConnect Phonebook e Press the Phone button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Erase All e The UConnect system will ask you to verify that you wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook After confirmation the phone book entries will be deleted Note that only the phone book in the current language is deleted List All Names in the UConnect Phonebook Press the Phone button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook List Names The UConnect system will play the names of all the phone book entries To call one of the names in the list press the Voice Recognition button during the playing of the desired name and say Call NOTE The user can also exercise Edit or Delete operations at this point The UConnect system will then prompt you as to the number designation you wish to call The selected number will be dialed w UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 81 Phone Call Features The following features can be accessed through the UConnect system if the feature s are available on your cellular service plan For example if your cellula
323. the vehicle is crowded move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint Refer to the section on Child Restraint You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly 46 THINGS KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE I 2 All occupants should wear their lap and shoulder WARNING belts properly e Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The airbags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions the airbags won t deploy at all 3 The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the front airbags room to inflate 4 If your vehicle has side airbags do not lean against Always wear your seat belts even though you the door airbags will inflate forcefully into the space have airbags between you and the door Being too close to the steering wheel or instru 5 If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be ment panel during front airbag deployment could modified to accommodate a disabled person contact cause serious injury Airbags need room to inflate the Customer Center Phone numbers are provided Sit back comfortably extending your arms to under If You Need Assistance in Section 9 of this reach the steering wheel or instrument panel manual Side airbags also need room to inflate Do not lean against the door Sit upright in the center of the s
324. ting the DVD Play Options will display the following e Subtitle Repeatedly Pressing SELECT will switch subtitles to different subtitle languages that are available on the disc If Equipped e Audio Stream Repeatedly Pressing SELECT will switch to different audio languages if supported on the disc If Equipped e Angle Repeatedly Pressing SELECT will change the viewing angle if it is supported by the DVD disc If Equipped NOTE The available selections for each of the above entries varies depending upon the disc NOTE These selections can only be made while play ing a DVD e VES Power Allows you to turn VES ON and OFF If Equipped e VES Lock Locks out rear VES remote controls If Equipped e VES CH1 CH2 Allows the user to change mode of either the IR1 or IR2 wireless headphones by pressing the Audio Select button If Equipped 164 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL aa e Set Home Clock Pressing the SELECT button will allow user to set the clock Turn TUNE control knob to adjust the hours then press and turn the TUNE control knob to adjust the minutes Press the TUNE control knob again to save changes Player Defaults Selecting this item will allow the user to scroll through the following items and set defaults according to customer preference Menu Language If Equipped Selecting this item will allow the user to choose the default startup DVD menu language effective only if langu
325. tion in drivability sags and or hesitations until the engine is fully warmed up Cruising Range Because E 85 fuel contains less energy per gallon than gasoline you will experience an increase in fuel con sumption You can expect your mpg and your driving range to decrease by about 30 compared to gasoline operation Replacement Parts Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle FFV are designed to be compatible with ethanol Always be sure that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol com patible parts CAUTION Replacing fuel system components with non ethanol compatible components can damage your vehicle Maintenance If you operate the vehicle using E 85 fuel follow Sched ule B in the maintenance schedule section of this manual CAUTION Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85 in your vehicle It will cause difficulty in cold starting and may affect drivability 256 STARTING AND OPERATING www ADDING FUEL Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap The gas cap is behind the fuel filler door on the left rear quarter panel of the vehicle If the gas cap is lost or damaged be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicl Fuel Filler Door After removing the gas cap place the gas cap tether cable over a hook on the inside of the fuel door This keeps the gas cap suspended away from and protects the vehicle s surface Fuel Filler Door Features STARTING AND OPERATING 257 CAUTION
326. tomatically be pulled into the CD Player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than an inch a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the disc number the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 w UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 177 CAUTION e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 inch 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism RES is a single CD player Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded Dual media disc types one side is a DVD the other side is a CD should not be used and can cause damage to the player EJECT Button Ejecting a CD Press the EJECT button to eject the CD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF NOTE Ejecting with ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft top models if equipped SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selectio
327. ts Instrument Cluster Description 139 Warnings and Cautions 6 Warranty Information 352 Washer Adding Fluid 111 Washers Windshield 109 Washing Vehicle cs ss sica satn m 314 Wheel Alignment and Balance 242 Wheel and Wheel Trim 315 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care 315 Wind Buffeting 29 123 Window Fogging 200 Windows scs aede dx e JORG quere Oe 26 POWERS Ud k was dig do 26 Windshield Washers 2 109 Windshield Wipers 109 303 Wiper Blade Replacement 303 Wipers Intermittent 111 YES Essentials Fabric Cleaning Procedure 316 NOTES NOTES NOTES NOTES NOTES
328. tting the Tone Balance and Fade Press the rotary TUNE control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the Bass tones Press the rotary TUNE control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the Mid Range tones Press the rotary TUNE control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the Treble tones Press the rotary TUNE control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Press the rotary TUNE control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Press the rotary TUNE control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for 5 seconds Pressing the Music Type button or turning the TUNE control knob within 5 seconds will allow the program format type to be selected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type informa tion Toggle the Music Type button to select the following format types Program Type 16 dd Dis No program type or un QU None Adult Hits Adlt Hit Classical Clas
329. ture allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under normal conditions However in a collision the belt will lock and reduce the risk of your striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out w r ss THINGS KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 WARNING Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and e Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and adjust the seat using a seat belt properly 2 The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front seat next to your arm Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous Seat belts are designed to go around the large bones of your body These are the strongest parts of your body and can take the forces of a collision the best Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make your injuries in a collision much worse You might suffer internal injuries or you could even slide out of part of the belt Follow these instruc tions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe too Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt People belted together can crash into one another in an accident hurting one another badly Never use a lap shoulder belt or lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size Pulling Out the Latch Plate 3 When the belt is long enough to f
330. und a CHECK TPM SYSTEM text message will be display in the EVIC and the graphic display will have in place of the pressure value of the spare tire location Once the original road tire has been properly repaired and put back onto the vehicle in place of the compact spare tire The TPMS will update the graphic display on the EVIC with a new tire pressure value instead of and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Lamp will be OFF as long as none of the road tire s are below the low pressure warning threshold The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h for this update to happen Dw STARTING AND OPERATING 247 CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equip ment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use tire sealant from a can or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the wheel rim sensor NOTE e The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and maintenance or to provide warn
331. ure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure This is defined as the tire pressure after a vehicle has not been driven for more than 3 hours and in outside ambient tempera ture Refer to the Tires General Information in this section for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle s tires The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure STARTING AND OPERATING 243 e The TPM System will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pres sure warning threshold for any reason including low temperature effects e The TPM System will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above recommended cold placard pressure Once the low tire pressure warning has been illuminated the tire pres sure must be increased to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the TPM warning lamp to be turned off The system will automatically update and the TPM warning lamp will extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been received The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h to receive this information For example your vehicle may have a recommended cold parked for more than 3 hours placard of 35 F 241 kPa If the ambient temperature is 68 F 20 C and
332. using the remote key fob if equipped To open the window part way press the window switch to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop The power window switches will remain active for up to 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned off Open ing either front door will cancel this feature The time for this feature is programmable For details refer to Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in tion 4 of this manual Auto Window Up Express Up with Anti Pinch Protection If Equipped Lift the window switch to the second detent release and the window will go up automatically To stop the window from going all the way up during the auto up operation push down on the switch briefly 28 THINGS KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE To close the window part way lift the window switch to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop NOTE e If the window runs into any obstacle during auto closure it will reverse direction and then stop Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to close the window e Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly during auto closure If this happens pull the switch lightly to the first detent and hold to close window manually WARNING
333. ustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage 37 Child Protection Door Lock System Automatic Locking Retractors ALR Rear 25 Mode If Equipped 37 Bl Power 5 26 Rear Seat Belts 38 Power Window Switches 26 Seat Belt Pretensioners 38 Auto Window Down Express Down BeltAlert Enhanced Warning System 38 TOUS Aha te m Seat Belts And Pregnant Women 39 10 Window Lockout Switch 28 supplemental Kestraint aysien ASRS SS THINGS KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 9 Airbag System Components 41 1 64 Front Seat Airbag Features 42 Exhaust Gas Airbag Deployment Sensors And Controls 47 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside Event Data Recorder EDR 52 Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Child Restraint es 244528522442 54 Outside The Vehicle 65 E Engine Break In Recommendations 63 10 THINGS KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ww A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS The dealer that sold you your new vehicle has the key code numbers for your vehicle locks These
334. ven though the call is in progress Once your call is answered you will hear the audio Mute Un mute Mute off When you mute the UConnect system you will still be able to hear the conversation coming from the other party but the other party will not be able to hear you In order to mute the UConnect system e Press the Voice Recognition button e Following the beep say Mute In order to un mute the UConnect system e Press the Voice Recognition button e Following the beep say Mute off Information Service When using AT amp T Wireless Service dialing to phone number 121 you can access voice activated automated system to receive news weather stocks traffic etc related information This is an AT amp T provided service Advanced Phone Connectivity Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone The UConnect system allows on going calls to be transferred from your cellular phone to the UConnect system without terminating the call To transfer an ongo ing call from your UConnect paired cellular phone to the UConnect system or vice versa press the Voice Recognition button and say Transfer Call www UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87 Connect or Disconnect Link Between the UConnect System and Cellular Phone Your cellular phone can be paired with many different electronic devices but can only be actively connected with one electronic device at a time
335. will display PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT DISC After the radio displays INSERT DISC insert the CD into the player Radio display will show LOADING DISC when the disc is loading and READING DISC when the radio is reading the disc CAUTION e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 inch 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism w UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 167 Eject Button Ejecting Compact Disc s Press the eject button and the push button with the corresponding number 1 6 where the CD was loaded and the disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy removal Radio display will show EJECTING DISC when the disc is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc Press and hold the eject button for 5 seconds and all CDs will be ejected from the radio The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF SEEK Button CD MODE Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow to scroll through tracks faster in CD MP3 MWA modes SCAN Button CD MODE Press the Scan button to scan through each track on the CD currently playing TIME Button CD MODE Press this button to change the
336. wn on Schedule WARNING The air cleaner can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire Do not remove the air cleaner unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air cleaner removed Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury 300 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE V You will never have to add water nor is periodic main tenance required Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn or even blind you Don t allow battery fluid to contact your eyes skin or clothing Don t lean over a battery when attaching clamps If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush the area immediately with large amounts of water NOTE The battery is stored in a compartment behind the left front fender and is accessible without removing the tire and wheel Remote battery terminals are located in the engine compartment for jump starting To access the battery turn the steering wheel fully to the right and remove the inner fender shield Battery gas is flammable and explosive Keep flame or sparks away from the battery Don t use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 volts Don t allow cable clamps to touch each other Battery posts terminals and related accessories con tain lead and lead compounds Wash hands after handling ww MAINTAINING YOUR VE
337. ww dodge com uconnect wWw jeep com uconnect The following are general phone to UConnect System pairing instructions e Press the Phone button to begin ww UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 77 After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing When prompted after the beep say Pair a Phone and follow the audible prompts You will be asked to say a four digit pin number which you will later need to enter into your cellular You can enter any four digit pin number You will not need to remember this pin number after the initial pairing process For identification purposes you will be prompted to give the UConnect system a name for your cellular phone Each cellular phone that is paired should be given a unique phone name You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a priority level between 1 and 7 1 being the highest priority You can pair up to seven cellular phones to your UConnect system However at any given time only one cellular phone can be in use connected to your UConnect System The priority allows the UConnect system to know which cellular phone to use if multiple cellular phones are in the vehicle at the same time For example if priority 3 and priority 5 phones are present in the vehicle the UConnect system will use the priority 3 cellular phone when you make a call You can select to use a lower priority cellular phone at an
338. y for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer controlled vehicle systems and features They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time using step by step troubleshooting and driveability procedures proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment Owner s Manuals These manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific Chrysler group vehicles Included are starting operating emergency and maintenance pro cedures as well as specifications capabilities and safety tips Call Toll Free at 1 800 890 4038 U S 1 800 387 1143 Canada Or Visit us on the World Wide Web at e www techauthority daimlerchrysler com e www daimlerchrysler ca manuals DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following describes the tire grading categories estab lished by the National highway Traffic Safety Adminis tration The specific grade rating assigned by the tire s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your car Passenger Car Tires Must Conform to Federal Safety Requirements in Addition to These Grades IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 355 Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled ditions on a specified government test course For ex ample a tire graded
339. y time refer to Advanced Phone Connectivity Dial by Saying a Number Press the Phone button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Dial System will prompt you to say the number you want call For example you can say 234 567 8901 The phone number that you enter must be of valid length and combination Based on the country in which the ve hicle was purchased the UConnect limits the user from dialing invalid combination of numbers For example in USA 234 567 890 is nine digits long which is not a valid USA phone number the closest valid phone number has ten digits 78 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ww The UConnect system will confirm the phone num ber and then dial The number will appear in the display of certain radios Call by Saying a Name Press the Phone button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Call System will prompt you to say the name of the person you want call After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the person you want to call For example you can say John Doe where John Doe is a previ ously stored name entry in the UConnect phone book Refer to Add Names to Your UConnect Phonebook to learn how to store a name in the phone book The UConnect system will confirm the name and then dial the corresponding phone number which may appear in the display of certa
340. your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected check the front of the A C con denser located in front of the radiator for an accumula tion of dirt or insects Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce air flow to the condenser reducing air conditioning performance 192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Mode Control Air Direction Mode control allows you to choose from several patterns of air distribution You can select either a primary mode as identified by the symbols or a blend of two of these modes The closer the control is to a particular mode the sasea more air distribution you re ceive from that mode Panel Mode Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel These outlets can be adjusted to direct air flow Bi Level Mode Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets NOTE There is a difference in temperature in any conditions other than full cold or full hot between the upper and lower outlets for added comfort The warmer air goes to the floor outlets This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions Floor Mode J Air is directed through the floor outlets with a small amount through the defrost and side window demist outlets Mix Mode Ve Air is directed through the floor defrost and side I s A window demist outlets This setting wo

Owners Manual - Dealer e

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents